Sunteți pe pagina 1din 288

1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services 1-1 ...........................................................

1.1 Engineering Requirements 1-2 .....................................................................


1.2 Engineering Planning 1-3 .............................................................................
1.2.1 Networking Diagram 1-3 ......................................................................
1.2.2 IP Address Allocation Diagram 1-3 ......................................................
1.2.3 Board Information of Each NE 1-4 .......................................................
1.2.4 Fiber & Cable Connection Table 1-7 ....................................................
1.2.5 Timeslot Allocation Diagram 1-7 ..........................................................
1.2.6 Board Level Protection Information 1-9 ................................................
1.2.7 Clock Tracing Diagram 1-9 ..................................................................
1.2.8 Orderwire Diagram 1-10 .........................................................................
1.3 Engineering Preparation 1-12 .........................................................................
1.3.1 NE Side 1-12 ..........................................................................................
1.3.2 T2000 Side 1-12 .....................................................................................
1.3.3 Document 1-12 .......................................................................................
1.4 Configuration Process 1-13 ............................................................................
1.4.1 Logging In to the T2000 1-14 .................................................................
1.4.2 Creating an NE 1-15 ..............................................................................
1.4.3 Creating an NE User 1-17 ......................................................................
1.4.4 Switching an NE User 1-18 ....................................................................
1.4.5 Creating a Board 1-18 ............................................................................
1.4.6 Creating a Fiber 1-20 .............................................................................
1.4.7 Creating a Topology Subnet 1-21 ..........................................................
1.4.8 Creating a Protection Subnet 1-22 .........................................................
1.4.9 Configuring Clock 1-24 ...........................................................................
1.4.10 Configuring SDH and PDH Services by Using the Trail
Management Function 1-27 ............................................................................
1.4.11 Configuring SDH and PDH Services by Using the Station
Function 1-31 ..................................................................................................
1.4.12 Configuring Board Level Protection 1-41 .............................................
1.4.13 Configuring Orderwire 1-42 ..................................................................
1.4.14 Setting the Performance Monitoring Start or Stop Status 1-45 ............
1.4.15 Setting Alarm Parameters 1-46 ............................................................
1.4.16 Backing Up NE Configuration Data 1-47 ..............................................
2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes 2-1 .................................
2.1 Networking Diagram 2-2 ...............................................................................
2.2 Protection Schemes 2-3 ...............................................................................
2.3 SNCP Ring with Non-Protection Chain 2-4 ..................................................
2.4 Four-Fiber MSP Ring with Non-Protection Chain 2-8 ...................................
2.5 SNCP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain 2-11 ................................................
2.6 SNCP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain 2-15 .................................................
2.7 Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain 2-18 .................................
2.8 Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain 2-20 ..................................
3 Configuring Ethernet Services 3-1 ....................................................................
3.1 Configuring the Point-to-Point EPL Service 3-3 ...........................................
3.1.1 Engineering Requirements 3-3 ............................................................
3.1.2 Engineering Planning 3-3 .....................................................................
3.1.3 Configuration Process(by Station) 3-7 .................................................
3.1.4 Configuration Process (by Trail) 3-20 ....................................................
3.2 Configuring the PORT Shared EPL Service 3-27 ...........................................
3.2.1 Engineering Requirements 3-27 ............................................................
3.2.2 Engineering Planning 3-27 .....................................................................
3.2.3 Configuration Process(by Station) 3-29 .................................................
3.2.4 Configuration Process (by Trail) 3-37 ....................................................
3.3 Configuring the VCTRUNK Shared EPL Service 3-43 ...................................
3.3.1 Engineering Requirements 3-43 ............................................................
3.3.2 Engineering Planning 3-43 .....................................................................
3.3.3 Configuration Process(by Station) 3-46 .................................................
3.3.4 Configuration Process (by Trail) 3-54 ....................................................
3.4 Configuring the EPLn Service 3-60 ................................................................
3.4.1 Engineering Requirements 3-60 ............................................................
3.4.2 Engineering Planning 3-60 .....................................................................
3.4.3 Configuration Process(by Station) 3-63 .................................................
3.4.4 Configuration Process (by Trail) 3-76 ....................................................
4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR 4-1 ......................................................
4.1 Configuring EVPL Services on RPR 4-2 ......................................................
4.1.1 Engineering Requirements 4-2 ............................................................
4.1.2 Engineering Planning 4-2 .....................................................................
4.1.3 Configuration Process 4-5 ....................................................................
4.2 Configuring EVPLn Services on RPR 4-23 ....................................................
4.2.1 Engineering Requirements 4-23 ............................................................
4.2.2 Engineering Planning 4-23 .....................................................................
4.2.3 Configuration Process 4-28 ....................................................................
5 Configuring ATM Services 5-1 ...........................................................................
5.1 Engineering Requirements 5-2 .....................................................................
5.2 Engineering Planning 5-3 .............................................................................
5.3 Configuration Process 5-6 ............................................................................
6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services 6-1 ........................................................
6.1 Overview 6-2 ................................................................................................
6.1.1 Requirements for the Environment Monitor 6-3 ...................................
6.1.2 Precautions During Configuration of the Broadcast Data Port 6-3 .......
6.2 Engineering Requirements 6-4 .....................................................................
6.3 Engineering Planning 6-4 .............................................................................
6.4 Configuration Process 6-5 ............................................................................
7 Configuring Build-in WDM System 7-1 .............................................................
7.1 Overview 7-2 ................................................................................................
7.2 Engineering Planning 7-3 .............................................................................
7.3 Configuration Process 7-5 ............................................................................
8 FAQ 8-1 ................................................................................................................
8.1 Configuring REG 8-2 ....................................................................................
8.2 Configuring Boards with FEC 8-4 .................................................................
8.3 Configuring the Extended Subrack 8-6 .........................................................
8.4 Configuring Intelligent Features 8-7 .............................................................
A Abbreviations and Acronyms A-1 .....................................................................
Index .................................................................................................................

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


HUAWEI








OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide
V100R003


Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission
System
Configuration Guide

Manual Version T2-041699-20051020-C-1.31
Product Version V100R003
BOM 31161899

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com


Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Copyright 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means
without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their
respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.


Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Summary of Updates
This section provides the update history of this manual and introduces the updates of
contents.
Update History
Manual Version Notes
T2-041636-20040501-C-1.10 Initial commercial release
T2-041665-20041120-C-1.20 Second commercial release
T2-041665-20050301-C-1.21 Third commercial release
T2-041699-20050820-C-1.30 Fourth commercial release
T2-041699-20051020-C-1.31 Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version.
Delete the description of the N1SF64 board.

Updates of Contents
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document
version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Manual Version 1.31
Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the
N1SF64 board.
Updates in Manual Version 1.30
Add the introduction to configuring broadcast data service.
Add the introduction to configuring Ethernet service by trail.
Add the introduction to configuring build-in WDM systems.
Add the introduction to FAQ.
Updates in Manual Version 1.21
Rework some images and configuration steps based on the T2000, version
V200R001C03.
Updates in Manual Version 1.20
Introduce procedures of service configuration based on the T2000, version

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
V200R001C02.
Add the introduction to the service configuration in protection schemes like SNCP,
linear MS, and four-fiber MSP.
Add the introduction to configuring Ethernet RPR services.
Add the introduction to configuring ATM services.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide Contents

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
i
Contents
1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services 1-1

1.1 Engineering Requirements 1-2
1.2 Engineering Planning 1-3
1.2.1 Networking Diagram 1-3
1.2.2 IP Address Allocation Diagram 1-3
1.2.3 Board Information of Each NE 1-4
1.2.4 Fiber & Cable Connection Table 1-7
1.2.5 Timeslot Allocation Diagram 1-7
1.2.6 Board Level Protection Information 1-9
1.2.7 Clock Tracing Diagram 1-9
1.2.8 Orderwire Diagram 1-10
1.3 Engineering Preparation 1-12
1.3.1 NE Side 1-12
1.3.2 T2000 Side 1-12
1.3.3 Document 1-12
1.4 Configuration Process 1-13
1.4.1 Logging In to the T2000 1-14
1.4.2 Creating an NE 1-15
1.4.3 Creating an NE User 1-17
1.4.4 Switching an NE User 1-18
1.4.5 Creating a Board 1-18
1.4.6 Creating a Fiber 1-20
1.4.7 Creating a Topology Subnet 1-21
1.4.8 Creating a Protection Subnet 1-22
1.4.9 Configuring Clock 1-24
1.4.10 Configuring SDH and PDH Services by Using the Trail Management Function 1-27
1.4.11 Configuring SDH and PDH Services by Using the Station Function 1-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide Contents

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
ii
1.4.12 Configuring Board Level Protection 1-41
1.4.13 Configuring Orderwire 1-42
1.4.14 Setting the Performance Monitoring Start or Stop Status 1-45
1.4.15 Setting Alarm Parameters 1-46
1.4.16 Backing Up NE Configuration Data 1-47
2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes 2-1

2.1 Networking Diagram 2-2
2.2 Protection Schemes 2-3
2.3 SNCP Ring with Non-Protection Chain 2-4
2.4 Four-Fiber MSP Ring with Non-Protection Chain 2-8
2.5 SNCP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain 2-11
2.6 SNCP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain 2-15
2.7 Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain 2-18
2.8 Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain 2-20
3 Configuring Ethernet Services 3-1

3.1 Configuring the Point-to-Point EPL Service 3-3
3.1.1 Engineering Requirements 3-3
3.1.2 Engineering Planning 3-3
3.1.3 Configuration Process(by Station) 3-7
3.1.4 Configuration Process (by Trail) 3-20
3.2 Configuring the PORT Shared EPL Service 3-27
3.2.1 Engineering Requirements 3-27
3.2.2 Engineering Planning 3-27
3.2.3 Configuration Process(by Station) 3-29
3.2.4 Configuration Process (by Trail) 3-37
3.3 Configuring the VCTRUNK Shared EPL Service 3-43
3.3.1 Engineering Requirements 3-43
3.3.2 Engineering Planning 3-43
3.3.3 Configuration Process(by Station) 3-46
3.3.4 Configuration Process (by Trail) 3-54
3.4 Configuring the EPLn Service 3-60
3.4.1 Engineering Requirements 3-60
3.4.2 Engineering Planning 3-60
3.4.3 Configuration Process(by Station) 3-63
3.4.4 Configuration Process (by Trail) 3-76
4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR 4-1

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide Contents

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
iii
4.1 Configuring EVPL Services on RPR 4-2
4.1.1 Engineering Requirements 4-2
4.1.2 Engineering Planning 4-2
4.1.3 Configuration Process 4-5
4.2 Configuring EVPLn Services on RPR 4-23
4.2.1 Engineering Requirements 4-23
4.2.2 Engineering Planning 4-23
4.2.3 Configuration Process 4-28
5 Configuring ATM Services 5-1

5.1 Engineering Requirements 5-2
5.2 Engineering Planning 5-3
5.3 Configuration Process 5-6
6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services 6-1

6.1 Overview 6-2
6.1.1 Requirements for the Environment Monitor 6-3
6.1.2 Precautions During Configuration of the Broadcast Data Port 6-3
6.2 Engineering Requirements 6-4
6.3 Engineering Planning 6-4
6.4 Configuration Process 6-5
7 Configuring Build-in WDM System 7-1

7.1 Overview 7-2
7.2 Engineering Planning 7-3
7.3 Configuration Process 7-5
8 FAQ 8-1

8.1 Configuring REG 8-2
8.2 Configuring Boards with FEC 8-4
8.3 Configuring the Extended Subrack 8-6
8.4 Configuring Intelligent Features 8-7
A Abbreviations and Acronyms A-1

Index i-1


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide Figures

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
iv
Figures
Figure 1-1 Networking diagram 1-3
Figure 1-2 IP address allocation diagram 1-4
Figure 1-3 Board layout of NE1 1-5
Figure 1-4 Board layout of NE2 and NE3 1-5
Figure 1-5 Board layout of NE4 1-6
Figure 1-6 Board layout of NE5 1-6
Figure 1-7 Timeslot allocation diagram 1-8
Figure 1-8 Clock tracing diagram 1-10
Figure 1-9 Orderwire diagram 1-11
Figure 2-1 Networking diagram 2-2
Figure 2-2 Timeslot allocation diagram 2-2
Figure 2-3 E1 signaling traffic flow on SNCP ring with non-protection chain 2-4
Figure 2-4 Signaling traffic flow on the SNCP with 1+1 linear MSP chain 2-12
Figure 2-5 Signaling traffic flow on the SNCP with 1:1 linear MSP chain 2-16
Figure 2-6 Signaling traffic flow on the MSP with 1+1 linear MSP chain 2-18
Figure 2-7 Signaling traffic flow on the MSP ring with 1:1 linear MSP chain 2-20
Figure 3-1 Ethernet service networking and port allocation 3-4
Figure 3-2 Board layout of NE1 3-4
Figure 3-3 Board layout of NE5 3-5
Figure 3-4 Service configuration diagram 3-5
Figure 3-5 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services 3-7
Figure 3-6 Ethernet service networking and port allocation 3-27
Figure 3-7 Service configuration diagram 3-28
Figure 3-8 Timeslot allocation diagram 3-29
Figure 3-9 Ethernet service networking and port allocation 3-43
Figure 3-10 Board layout of NE2 and NE3 3-44
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide Figures

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
v
Figure 3-11 Service configuration diagram 3-44
Figure 3-12 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services 3-45
Figure 3-13 Ethernet service networking and port allocation 3-60
Figure 3-14 Board layout of NE2 and NE3 3-61
Figure 3-15 Board layout of NE4 3-61
Figure 3-16 Service configuration diagram 3-62
Figure 3-17 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services 3-63
Figure 4-1 Ethernet service networking and port allocation 4-2
Figure 4-2 Board layout of NE11, NE22, NE33 and NE44 4-3
Figure 4-3 Service configuration diagram 4-3
Figure 4-4 SDH timeslot allocation diagram 4-5
Figure 4-5 Ethernet service networking and port allocation 4-24
Figure 4-6 Board layout of NE11, NE22, NE33, and NE44 4-24
Figure 4-7 Service configuration diagram 4-25
Figure 4-8 Timeslot allocation diagram 4-28
Figure 5-1 ATM service networking and port allocation 5-3
Figure 5-2 Board layout of NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 5-4
Figure 5-3 Service configuration diagram 5-5
Figure 5-4 Timeslot allocation diagram 5-6
Figure 6-1 Overhead channel 6-2
Figure 6-2 Application of broadcast data port 6-4
Figure 7-1 Two channel adding/dropping system comprising two LWXs and an MR2 (without protection to
optical channels) 7-2
Figure 7-2 Two channel adding/dropping system comprising two LWXs and two MR2s (with protection to
optical channels) 7-2
Figure 7-3 Networking application of build-in WDM systems 7-3
Figure 7-4 Board layout of NE1 and NE2 7-4
Figure 8-1 Basic configuration of REG 8-2
Figure 8-2 Required boards for main subrack and extended subrack 8-6


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide Tables

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
vi
Tables
Table 1-1 Service requirements among nodes 1-2
Table 1-2 Fiber & cable connection table 1-7
Table 1-3 Description of the timeslot allocation diagram 1-8
Table 1-4 Board level protection information 1-9
Table 1-5 Clock source priority table 1-10
Table 1-6 Process for configuring SDH and PDH services 1-13
Table 2-1 Configuration differences between MSP ring with non-protection chain and other protection
schemes 2-3
Table 2-2 Service configuration of each NE (SNCP ring with non-protection chain) 2-5
Table 2-3 Configuration of extra optical interface boards in NE1NE4 2-8
Table 2-4 Service configuration of each NE on the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring 2-9
Table 2-5 Configuration of extra optical interface boards in NE4 and NE5 2-11
Table 2-6 Service configuration of each NE (SNCP ring with 1+1 linear MSP chain) 2-13
Table 2-7 Service configuration of each NE (SNCP with 1:1 linear MSP chain) 2-16
Table 2-8 Service configuration of each NE (MSP with 1+1 linear MSP chain) 2-19
Table 2-9 Service configuration of each NE (MSP with 1:1 linear MSP chain) 2-21
Table 3-1 Mapping between Ethernet boards and Ethernet services 3-1
Table 3-2 Service requirement of each station 3-3
Table 3-3 Ethernet service connection table 3-6
Table 3-4 Process of point-to-point EPL service configuration 3-7
Table 3-5 Process of creating point-to-point EPL service (by trail) 3-21
Table 3-6 Ethernet service connection table 3-28
Table 3-7 Process of PORT shared EPL service configuration 3-29
Table 3-8 Main procedures of creating PORT-shared EPL service (by trail) 3-37
Table 3-9 Ethernet service connection table 3-44
Table 3-10 Process of VCTRUNK shared EPL service configuration 3-46
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide Tables

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
vii
Table 3-11 Process of creating VCTRUNK-shared EPL service (by trail) 3-54
Table 3-12 Ethernet service connection table 3-62
Table 3-13 Forwarding filter table 3-63
Table 3-14 Process of EPLn service configuration 3-63
Table 3-15 Process of creating EPLn service (by trail) 3-76
Table 4-1 Ethernet service connection table 4-4
Table 4-2 Process of configuring EVPL service on RPR 4-5
Table 4-3 Relation between PORTs and physical interfaces 4-7
Table 4-4 The priority of RPR services 4-11
Table 4-5 NE11 Ethernet service connection table 4-25
Table 4-6 NE22 Ethernet service connection table 4-26
Table 4-7 NE33 Ethernet service connection table 4-26
Table 4-8 NE44 Ethernet service connection table 4-27
Table 4-9 Forwarding filter table 4-28
Table 4-10 Process of configuring EVPLn service on RPR 4-29
Table 5-1 ATM service requirements of each node 5-2
Table 5-2 ATM service connection table 5-5
Table 5-3 The configuration rule of VCTRUNCK binding path and time slot 5-6
Table 5-4 Process of configuring ATM services 5-7
Table 6-1 Definitions of the broadcast data port pins 6-3
Table 6-2 NE parameters 6-4
Table 7-1 Main procedures of configuring build-in WDM systems 7-5
Table 8-1 Boards supported by the OptiX OSN 2500 REG 8-2
Table 8-2 Configuration requirements for extended subracks 8-6










OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide About This Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xiii

About This Manual
Release Notes
This manual covers:
The OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003
The OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003
The OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003
Related Manuals
The following table shows the manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OSN 2500, and OSN
1500.
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Technical Manual System
Description
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Technical Manual System
Description
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Technical Manual System
Description
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Technical Manual Networking
and Application
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Technical Manual Networking
and Application
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Technical Manual Networking
and Application
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Installation Manual
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Installation Manual
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Installation Manual
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Electronic Documentation
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Electronic Documentation
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Electronic Documentation
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Documentation Guide
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Routine
Maintenance
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide About This Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xiv
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Alarm and
Performance Event
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Commissioning Guide
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Configuration Guide
Note: The manual name with OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 indicates that the manual is shared by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.

Main points of the manuals for the OptiX OSN series products are as follows.
Documentation Guide
Introduces the contents and usage of the manuals.
Technical Manual System Description
Introduces the functionality, structure, performance, specifications, and theory of
the product.
Technical Manual Networking and Application
Introduces the networking, protection, and application of the product.
Hardware Description Manual
Introduces the hardware of the product, including the cabinet, subrack, power, fan,
board, and a variety of interfaces.
Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance
Introduces the main items and precautions involved in routing maintenance.
Maintenance Troubleshooting
Guides the analysis and troubleshooting of common faults.
Maintenance Alarm and Performance Event
Guides the way of processing alarms and performance events.
Installation Manual
Guides the on-site installation of the product, covering the installation of cabinet,
subrack and components, and grounding specifications.
Commissioning Guide
Introduces the equipment commissioning process, including indices of hardware,
software, and service operation.
Configuration Guide
Introduces the way and procedures of configuring SDH services, Ethernet private
line services, Ethernet LAN services, RPR services, and ATM services on the
T2000.
Electronic Documentation (CD-ROM)
Covers all the preceding manuals. Acrobat Reader is attached.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide About This Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xv
Organization
The manual is organized as follows.
Chapter Description
Chapter 1 Configuring SDH/PDH
Services
This chapter introduces creating NEs, boards,
fibers & cables, and protection subnet, clock, and
SDH services, orderwire, and protection, and
backing up data on the T2000 through an
example.
Chapter 2 Configuring Service in
Other Protection Schemes
This chapter introduces the service configuration
in protection schemes like SNCP, linear MS, and
four-fiber MSP ring.
Chapter 3 Configuring Ethernet
Services
This chapter introduces configuring Ethernet
services on the T2000 through an example.
Chapter 4 Configuring Ethernet
Services on RPR
This chapter introduces configuring Ethernet
services on RPR on the T2000 through an
example.
Chapter 5 Configuring ATM
Services
This chapter introduces configuring ATM
services on the T2000.
Chapter 6 Configuring Broadcast
Data Services
This chapter introduces configuring broadcast
data services on the T2000.
Chapter 7 Configuring Build-in
WDM System
This chapter introduces configuring build-in
WDM system on the T2000.
Chapter 8 FAQ This chapter introduces how to solve some
problems, when you configure the equipment.
Appendix A Abbreviations and
Acronyms
The appendix lists all abbreviations used in the
system description together with their full names
to help with the comprehension.

Intended Audience
This manual is intended for:
Network administrator
Maintenance engineer
Provisioning engineer
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions.
Symbol Conventions
Symbol Description
Warning
A warning notice with this symbol indicates high voltage could result
in harm to person.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide About This Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xvi
Symbol Description
Warning
A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal injury.
Caution
A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment
damage or loss of data.
Important
Note
An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an
undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary
information.
Note A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful,
non-critical information.

GUI Conventions
Convention Description
< > Button name are inside angle brackets. For example, click the <OK>
button
[ ] Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside
square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.
/ Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example,
[File/Create/Folder].

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-1
1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services
This chapter describes the process of configuring SDH and PDH services on the
T2000 through a configuration sample. In addition, this chapter describes related
engineering requirements and engineering information. Through this example, you
can learn how to configure SDH and PDH services and other similar services.

Note:
In this chapter, the OptiX OSN 3500 product is taken as an example. For the OptiX
OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, service configuration is performed in the same
way. The only difference is that the boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN
1500 are inserted in different slots.

Note:
The screen shots contained in this manual vary with the T2000 version and network
element (NE) software version. If the versions mismatch, maybe the screen shots look
different with the actual one.

This chapter introduces the following topics:
Engineering Requirements
Engineering Planning
Engineering Preparation
Configuration Process
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-2
1.1 Engineering Requirements
In a city, a new communication network is to be constructed among A, B, C, D, and E.
Table 1-1 shows the service requirements among these nodes.
Table 1-1 Service requirements among nodes
Node A B C D E
A - 32 x E1 31 x E1 32 x E1
B 32 x E1 - - -
C 31 x E1 32 x E1
D 32 x E1 31 x E1, 3 x E3
E 32 x E1 31 x E1, 3 x E3 -

The distance between any two nodes of A, B, C, and D is not more than 50 km. Node
E is 80 km far from the nearest node D. The services between these nodes need
network level protection. Moreover, the central node A needs to provide TPS
protection for PDH services.
Recently, these nodes may require service expansion and Ethernet data services.

Note:
For the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, select proper service requirements
according to their slot features and service access capacity.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-3
1.2 Engineering Planning
Based on the above requirements, the engineering design department conducts
planning and outputs the following engineering information:
Networking Diagram
IP Address Allocation Diagram
Board Information of Each NE
Fiber & Cable Connection Table
Timeslot Allocation Diagram
Board Level Protection Information
Clock Tracing Diagram
Orderwire Diagram
1.2.1 Networking Diagram
Five OptiX OSN 3500 NEs form an STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section
protection (MSP) ring with an STM-4 non-protection chain. See Figure 1-1. NE1, NE2,
NE3, and NE4 are on the ring, NE5 is on the chain. NE1 is a gateway NE (GNE).
STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring
T2000
STM-4 two-fiber
bidirectional non-
protection chain
NE1 (A)
NE2 (B)
NE3 (C)
NE4 (D) NE5 (E)
B D
25 km
35 km 30 km
40 km
80 km

Figure 1-1 Networking diagram

1.2.2 IP Address Allocation Diagram
Figure 1-2 shows the IP address allocation diagram.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-4
T2000
2
129.9.0.2
OSN 3500
129.9.0.1
3
129.9.0.3
OSN 3500
129.9.0.1
4
OSN 3500
129.9.0.1
1
129.9.0.1
OSN 3500
129.9.0.1
NM ID T2000
IP address
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0
5
OSN 3500
129.9.0.1
129.9.0.54
129.9.0.4
STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring
STM-4 two-fiber
bidirectional non-
protection chain
129.9.0.5
NE ID
IP address
Equipment type
Gateway

Figure 1-2 IP address allocation diagram

1.2.3 Board Information of Each NE

Note:
In this section, the board layout of each OptiX OSN 3500 NE is given. For the OptiX
OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, refer to the actual networking and board layout
for configuration.

Figure 1-3, Figure 1-5, and Figure 1-6 show the board layout of NE1, NE4, and NE5
respectively. Figure 1-4 shows the board layout of NE2 and NE3.

Note:
We provide one more PQ1 board in NE1 and NE4 respectively as backup boards for
this project.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-5
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
D
7
5
S
P
I
U
A
U
X
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
P
Q
1
P
Q
1
P
Q
1
P
Q
1
S
L
1
6
S
L
1
6
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S

Figure 1-3 Board layout of NE1

FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
P
Q
1
S
L
1
6
S
L
1
6
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S

Figure 1-4 Board layout of NE2 and NE3

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-6
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
P
Q
1
P
Q
1
S
L
1
6
S
L
1
6
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
C
3
4
S
S
L
4
P
L
3

Figure 1-5 Board layout of NE4

FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
P
Q
1
S
L
4
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
C
3
4
S
P
L
3

Figure 1-6 Board layout of NE5

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-7
1.2.4 Fiber & Cable Connection Table
Table 1-2 shows the fiber & cable connection relation.
Table 1-2 Fiber & cable connection table
Local end Remote end
NE name Slot Board
name
Port No. NE name Slot Board
name
Port
No.
NE1 7 SL16 1IN NE4 12 SL16 1OUT
NE1 7 SL16 1OUT NE4 12 SL16 1IN
NE2 7 SL16 1IN NE1 12 SL16 1OUT
NE2 7 SL16 1OUT NE1 12 SL16 1IN
NE3 7 SL16 1IN NE2 12 SL16 1OUT
NE3 7 SL16 1OUT NE2 12 SL16 1IN
NE4 7 SL16 1IN NE3 12 SL16 1OUT
NE4 7 SL16 1OUT NE3 12 SL16 1IN
NE5 7 SL4 1IN NE4 13 SL4 1OUT
NE5 7 SL4 1OUT NE4 13 SL4 1IN

1.2.5 Timeslot Allocation Diagram

Note:
For the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, timeslot allocation and service
configuration are the same as the OptiX OSN 3500. The only difference is that the
boards are inserted in different slots.

Figure 1-7 shows the timeslot allocation between NEs.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-8
Timeslot
NE2 Station NE3 NE4 NE1
12-SL16-1
NE1
t2:1-32 t2:1-32
VC12:1-32
t2:33-63 t2:33-63
VC12:33-63
1#VC4
t2:1-32
2#VC4
t3:1-32 t2:1-32
VC12:1-32
7-SL16-112-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
Forward
NE5 NE4
13-SL4-1
t2:33-63
1#VC4
t2:1-32
2#VC4
VC3:1-3
t14:1-3 t14:1-3
t2:33-63
7-SL4-1
Ring
Line
Add/Drop
VC12:1-32
VC12:1-32
VC12:33-63
Station

Figure 1-7 Timeslot allocation diagram

Table 1-3gives a description of the timeslot allocation diagram.
Table 1-3 Description of the timeslot allocation diagram
Sign Meaning Remarks
t2 The E1 tributary board in
slot 2

T3 The E1 tributary board in
slot 3

t14 The E3 tributary board in
slot 14

The number following the
tributary board
The number of E1 or E3
path
For example, t2:1-32
indicates the first to the
thirty-second E1 paths of the
tributary board in slot 2.
Numbers above the horizontal
lines
The timeslot number of
the VC-4 occupied


Take NE4 as an example. The service shown in the diagram is as follows.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-9
Configure Occupying
32 x E1 services from NE3 to NE5 pass
through NE4
132 timeslots of the first VC-4
The E1 paths 3363 of the tributary board in
slot 2 NE4 exchange services with those of
the tributary board in slot 2 of NE5
3363 timeslots of the first VC-4
The E1 paths 132 of the tributary board in
slot 2 of NE4 exchange services with those
of the tributary board in slot 3 of NE1
132 timeslots of the second VC-4
The E3 paths 13 of the tributary board in
slot 14 of NE4 exchange services with those
of the tributary board in slot 14 of NE5
13 timeslots of the second VC-4

1.2.6 Board Level Protection Information
Table 1-4 shows the board level protection information.
Table 1-4 Board level protection information
NE TPS protection PIU backup SCC backup Cross-connect backup
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5

1.2.7 Clock Tracing Diagram
Figure 1-8 shows the clock tracing diagram in the networking.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-10
9-1
NE1
OSN 3500
BITS/Internal
9-5
NE5
OSN 3500
Extended ID - NE ID
NE name
Equipment type
Clock source list
BITS
Master clock
7-SL4-1/Internal
9-2
NE2
OSN 3500
7-S16-1/
12-S16-1/Internal
9-3
NE3
OSN 3500
7-S16-1/
12-S16-1/Internal
9-4
NE4
OSN 3500
7-S16-1/
12-S16-1/Internal

Figure 1-8 Clock tracing diagram

Table 1-5 shows the clock source priority of NE1NE5.
Table 1-5 Clock source priority table
NE Clock source 1 Clock source 2 Clock source 3 Extend SSM enabled
NE1 External clock
source 1 (BITS)
Internal clock
source
Yes
NE2 7-S16-1 12-S16-1 Internal clock
source
Yes
NE3 7-S16-1 12-S16-1 Internal clock
source
Yes
NE4 7-S16-1 12-S16-1 Internal clock
source
Yes
NE5 7-SL4-1 Internal clock
source
Yes

To avoid mutual tracing of clocks in this example, set the clock ID of the external clock
source 1 (BITS) on NE1 as 1, and that of the internal clock source as 2.
1.2.8 Orderwire Diagram
Figure 1-9 shows the orderwire diagram.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-11
T2000
9-2
NE2
OSN 3500
1002/9999
9-3
NE3
OSN 3500
1003/9999
9-4
NE4
OSN 3500
1004/9999
9-1
NE1
OSN 3500
1001/9999
NM tag T2000
NM name
IP address
NM
129.9.0.254
NE3-12-SL16-1 NE3-7-SL16-1
NE2-7-SL16-1
NE2-12-SL16-1
NE1-7-SL16-1
NE1-12-SL16-1
NE4-7-SL16-1
NE4-12-SL16-1
NE4-13-SL4-1 NE5-7-SL4-1
9-5
NE5
OSN 3500
1005/9999
Extended ID - NE ID
NE name
Equipment type
Orderwire/
Conference call
STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MS ring
STM-4 two-fiber
bidirectional non-
protection chain

Figure 1-9 Orderwire diagram

Howl tone may be generated if the conference call is configured as a ring. The OptiX
OSN 3500, the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500 can release loop
automatically for orderwire and conference calls.
Since there are not many NEs in this network, it is unnecessary to configure subnet
number for optical ports of each NE.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-12
1.3 Engineering Preparation
Verify the following aspects before configuring services on the T2000.
1.3.1 NE Side
The OptiX OSN 3500 has been installed and commissioning at each station has
been finished.
The running indicator Active is ON.
Optical fibers between stations are correctly connected.
1.3.2 T2000 Side
The T2000 software and hardware have been installed correctly.
The sysmonitor is running properly.
The T2000 communicates with the GNE properly. The checking method is as
follows: Use the ping command to ping the IP address of the GNE. If successfully,
it means the connection is normal.
1.3.3 Document
Engineering planning information is available.
After logging in to the T2000 client, the key F1 can be used to access online help.
Manuals for the OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX iManager T2000 are ready.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-13
1.4 Configuration Process
Table 1-6 describes the process for configuring the SDH network on the T2000.
Table 1-6 Process for configuring SDH and PDH services
Stage Description Refer to Remarks
1 Logging in to the T2000 Section 1.4.1
2 Creating an NE as root NE user Section 1.4.2
3 Creating an NE user Section 1.4.3
4 Switching an NE user Section 1.4.4
5 Creating a board Section 1.4.5
6 Creating a fiber Section 1.4.6
7 Creating a topology subnet Section 1.4.7 Optional
8 Creating a protection subnet Section 1.4.8
9 Configuring clock Section 1.4.9
10 Creating SDH and PDH services Section 1.4.10
and section 1.4.11
Use either the trail
function or station
function.
11 Configuring board level protection Section 1.4.12
12 Configuring orderwire Section 1.4.13
13 Setting performance parameters Section 1.4.14
14 Setting alarm parameters Section 1.4.15
15 Backing up NE configuration data Section 1.4.16

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-14
1.4.1 Logging In to the T2000

Caution:
If the T2000 server and T2000 client are installed on one computer, when logging in to
the T2000, the IP address and port number of the T2000 server are 127.0.0.1 and
9801 (recommended).
If the T2000 server and T2000 client are installed on different computers, when
logging in to the T2000, the IP address and port number of the T2000 server are
129.9.0.254 and 9801 respectively.

In this section, we describe the procedure when the T2000 server and T2000 client
are installed on different computers.
Follow the steps below to log in to the T2000.
Step Action
1 Double-click the T2000Client shortcut icon on the desktop to display the
Login interface.
2 Enter the user name, password and server address.
User Name: admin
Password: T2000
Server: 129.9.0.254:9801
3 Click <Login>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-15
1.4.2 Creating an NE
1. Creating a GNE: NE1
Follow the steps below to create a GNE.
Step Action
1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and select [Create/Topology
Object]. Select the NE type: OSN Series-OptiX OSN 3500.
Note:
To configure the OptiX OSN 2500, select the NE type - OptiX OSN 2500.
To configure the OptiX OSN 1500, select the NE type - OptiX OSN 1500.
To configure the OptiX OSN 2500 REG, select the NE type - OptiX OSN 2500 REG.

2 Enter the NE attributes according to the IP address allocation diagram (see
Figure 1-2).
ID: 1
Extended ID: 9
Name: NE1
Gateway Type: IP Gateway
IP Address: 129.9.0.1
Port: 1400
NE User: root (default)
Password: password
Leave Preconfiguration unselected.
3 Click <OK>.
4 Click the place in the Main Topology where you want the icon of NE1 to appear.
The icon is marked with or in the upper left. means this NE is a
GNE, and means this NE is unprovisioned.

Note:
NE user root is the default user, its default password is password.
If you want to create a REG NE, refer to Chapter 8 FAQ.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-16
2. Creating Non-Gateway NEs: NE2NE5
Follow the steps below to create a non-gateway NE.
Step Action
1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and select [Create/Topology
Object]. Select the NE type OSN SeriesOptiX OSN 3500.
Note:
To configure the OptiX OSN 2500, select the NE type - OptiX OSN 2500.
To configure the OptiX OSN 1500, select the NE type - OptiX OSN 1500.
To configure the OptiX OSN 2500 REG, select the NE type - OptiX OSN 2500 REG.

2 Enter the NE attributes according to the IP address allocation diagram (see Figure
1-2).
ID: 2
Extended ID: 9
Name: NE2
Gateway Type: Non-Gateway
Affiliated Gateway: NE1
NE User: root (default)
Password: password
Leave Preconfiguration unselected.
3 Click <OK>.
4 Click the place in the Main Topology where you want the icon of NE2 to appear.
The icon is marked with a in the upper left. means this NE is
unprovisioned.
5 Repeat Steps 14 to create the NE icon for NE3, NE4 and NE5 respectively.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-17
1.4.3 Creating an NE User
Follow the steps below to create an NE user.
Step Action
1 Select [System Administration/NE Security Management/NE User Management]
from the Main Menu.
2 Select NE1NE5 from the Object Tree and click the double-right-arrow button
(red).
3 Select NE1NE5 and click <Add>.
4 Enter the information about the new NE user.
For example, create a unified NE user t2000 for NE1. See the following figure.
The user name contains 4 to 16 characters. The password contains 6 to16
characters, including at least one letter and one numeral.

5 Click <OK>. After the Operation Succeeded dialog box is displayed, click
<Close>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-18
1.4.4 Switching an NE User
Follow the steps below to switch an NE user.
Step Action
1 Select [System Administration/NE User/NE Login Management] from the Main
Menu.
2 Select NE1NE5 from the Object Tree and click the double-right-arrow button
(red).
3 Select NE1NE5, and click <Switch NE User>.
4 Enter the user name and password of the NE user you wish to switch to. For
example, switch the NE user of NE1NE5 to t2000.

5 Click <OK>. After the Operation succeeded dialog box is displayed, click
<Close>.

1.4.5 Creating a Board
You can create a board in the following two methods:
Add a board in the NE Panel manually, applicable to NEs configured.
Add a board in the configuration wizard, applicable to NEs unprovisioned.

Note:
The second method is recommended. However, if you wish to add a board to a
running NE, only the first method is applicable. The two methods are described in this
section. You can select either of them.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-19
Note:
The OptiX OSN 3500 is taken as an example to describe this procedure. For the OptiX
OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, a board is created in the same way, except that
the board and its slot are different.

1. Adding a Board in the NE Panel Manually creation:
Follow the steps below to create a board in the NE Panel manually.
Step Action
1 Double-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology to display the NE Panel.
2 According to Figure 1-3, right-click the desired slot and select the corresponding
board.

3 Click <Close> to exit the NE Panel.
4 Repeat Steps 14 to configure NE2, NE3, NE4 and NE5 respectively.
Figure 1-4 shows the board layout of NEs 2 and 3, Figure 1-5 shows that of NE4,
and Figure 1-6 shows that of NE5.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-20
2. Adding a Board in the Configuration Wizard creation:
Follow the steps below to create a board in the configuration wizard.
Step Action
1 Double-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology to open the NE configuration
wizard.
2 Select Manual Configuration and click <Next>.
3 Confirm NE attributes and click <Next>.
4 Enter the NE Panel. Click <Query Physical Slot>, and the board configured on
the NE is shown.
Leave Extended unselected, and then click <Next>.
Note:
You need to select "Extended when the subrack of the NE is used as an extended
subrack.
5 Select Verify and Run, and click <Finish>. Configuration data is sent to the NE.
6 Repeat Steps 15 to configure NE2, NE3, NE4 and NE5 respectively.
Figure 1-4 shows the board layout of NEs 2 and 3, Figure 1-5 shows that of NE4,
and Figure 1-6 shows that of NE5.

1.4.6 Creating a Fiber
Follow the steps below to create a fiber.
Step Action
1
Select the shortcut icon on the toolbar of the Main Topology and the cursor
changes to a +.
2 Click the source NE NE1 of the fiber on the Main Topology. Select the source
board 12-SL16, and the source port 1.
3 Use the same method to select the fiber sink NE NE2, the sink board 7-SL16,
and the sink port 1.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-21
Step Action
4 Enter the information about the fiber in the "Create Fiber/Cable" dialog box. Click
<OK>.

5 According to Table 1-2, repeat Steps 14 to create fiber connection between
NEs to form the five NEs into a ring with chain topology.

1.4.7 Creating a Topology Subnet
Follow the steps below to create a topology subnet.
Step Action
1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and select [Create/Subnet].
The Create Subnet dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the Basic Attributes tab and enter the subnet name OptiXOSN
production.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-22
Step Action
3 Select the Object Selection tab. Select NE1NE5 from the Object Not
Selected pane, click to add them to the Selected Object pane. Click
<OK>.

After the subnet is successfully created, its icon on the Main Topology is
displayed as .
4 Right-click the icon of this subnet and select [Enter], and you can enter the
topology view only containing this protection subnet. Right-click and select
[Return] and you can enter the Main Topology containing all topology objects.

Note:
The subnet created here is just a topological concept. For the convenience of
management, topology objects in the same area of a network or with similar attributes
are usually arranged in one subnet for display.

1.4.8 Creating a Protection Subnet
Before service configuration, you need to create a protection subnet. In this example,
you need to complete the configuration of the following protection schemes: a
two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring and a non-protection chain.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-23
1. Creating a Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring
NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 form a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. Follow the steps
below to create a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Protection View(N)] from the Main Topology.
2 Select [Protection View/Create SDH Protection Subnet/2f_MSP SPRing] from
the Main Menu of the Protection View. The Wizard for Creating Two-Fiber
Bidirectional MS Shared Protection Ring is displayed.
3 Set the following parameters.
Name: 2f_MS_SPRing_1
Rate: STM-16
4 On the topology view on the right, double-click the icons of NE1NE4 in the order
of networking, to add them into the protection subnet. Select the default MSP
Node for Node Attributes. Click <Next>.

5 Confirm link information and click <Finish>. A dialog box is displayed and
indicates that the protection subnet is created successfully.

2. Creating a Non-Protection Chain
NE4 and NE5 form a non-protection chain. Follow the steps below to create a
non-protection chain.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Protection View(N)] from the Main Topology.
2 Select [Protection View/Create SDH Protection Subnet/NP Chain] from the Main
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-24
Step Action
Menu of the Protection View. The Wizard for Creating Chain without Protection
is displayed.
3 Set the following parameters.
Name: NP_Chain_1
Level: STM-4
4 On the topology view on the right, double-click the icons of NE4 and NE5 in turn
to add them into the protection subnet. Click <Next>.
5 Confirm link information and click <Finish>. A dialog box is displayed and
indicates that the protection subnet is created successfully.


1.4.9 Configuring Clock

Note:
The NE can trace external clock building integrated timing supply (BITS), line clock,
tributary clock and internal clock. To realize clock protection, you need to set at least
two clock tracing sources Usually, the tributary clock is not used as the reference clock
of the clock subnet.

1. Configuring the Clock Source Priority Table
Follow the steps below to configure the clock source priority table.
Step Action
1 Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select the operation object NE1 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/Clock/Clock Source Priority] from the Function Tree.
3 Select the Clock Source Priority tab.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-25
4 Click <Create>, select External Clock Source 1, and click <OK>.
5 Select External Clock Source 1. Take the default value for External Clock
Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte. In this example, set External
Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for NE1 only.
6 Set External Clock Source 1 to the highest priority and click <Apply>.
Select External Clock Source 1. You can click to lower its priority or to
increase its priority. The internal clock source has the lowest priority.

7 According to Table 1-5, repeat Steps 15 to configure the clock tracing source
and the clock priority table for NE2, NE3, NE4, and NE5.

Note:
When setting tributary clock timing, be aware of the mapping relationship between
tributary timing channels and ports.
For the PQ1 or the PQM, the ninth port maps the second tributary timing channel.

2. Configuring Clock Source Restoration Parameters and Clock Source
Switching Conditions
Follow the steps below to configure clock source restoration parameters and clock
source switching conditions.
Step Action
1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select the operation object NE1 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/Clock/Clock Source Switching] from the Function Tree.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-26
Step Action
3 Select the Clock Source Restoration Parameter tab. Set the following
parameters.
Higher Priority Clock Source Revertion Mode: Auto-revertive
Clock Source WTR Time(Min): 5 Minute(s)
Click <Apply>.

4 Repeat Steps 14 to configure clock source restoration parameters for NE2,
NE3, NE4, and NE5 respectively.
5 Configure clock source switching conditions for NE2, NE3, NE4, and NE5
respectively.
Select the Clock Source Switching Condition tab and set the following
parameters.
AIS Alarm Generated: No
RLOS, RLOF, and OOF Alarms Generated: Yes
B2_EXC alarm Generated: No
Click <Apply>.

3. Configuring a Clock Subnet
Follow the steps below to configure a clock subnet.
Step Action
1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select the operation object NE1 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/Clock/Clock Subnet Configuration] from the Function Tree.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-27
Step Action
3 Select the Clock Subnet tab and set the following parameters.
Affiliated Subnet: 0
Protection Status: Start Extended SSM Protocol
Clock Source ID of External Clock Source 1: 1
Clock Source ID of Internal Clock Source: 2
Click <Apply>.

In this example, set clock source ID for NE1 only.
4 Select the Clock Quality tab and then the Clock Source Quality tab, and set
the following parameters.
Clock Source Quality of External Clock Source 1: G.811 clock signal
Clock Source Quality of Internal Clock Source: G.811 clock signal
Click <Apply>.
5 Select the SSM Output Control tab. Set the control status of line ports
7-N2SL16-1 and 12-N2SL16-1 as Enable.
Click <Apply>.
6 Repeat Steps 15 to configure the clock subnet parameters for NE2, NE3, NE4,
and NE5.

1.4.10 Configuring SDH and PDH Services by Using the Trail Management Function
You can configure SDH and PDH services on the T2000 in two ways:
Use the trail management function.
Use the station configuration function. Configure services for single NEs on the
network in sequence. The service must be able to be added to or dropped from the
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-28
source and the sink NEs and pass through the middle ones.

Note:
You need to get the license for the trail management function. Otherwise, you can only
use the station configuration function.

Note:
The OptiX OSN 3500 is taken as an example to describe this procedure. For the OptiX
OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, the trail is created in the same way, except that
the boards configured, slots, and timeslots are different.

1. Creating a VC-4 Server Trail

Note:
The VC-4 server trail is used to carry the tributary service between the source and the
sink sites and support the lower order cross-connection on the lines. Before
configuring the tributary service trail of each site and line, the VC-4 server trail
between sites should be created first. You do not need to create a VC-4 server trail for
a VC4 trail.

Follow the steps below to create a VC-4 server trail.
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Trail View] from the Main Topology.
2 Select [Trail/SDH Trail Creation] to display the trail creation view. Set the
following parameters.
Direction: Bidirectional
Level: VC4 Server Trail
Resources Usage Strategy: Protected Resource
Protection Priority Strategy: Trail Protection First
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-29
Step Action
3 Select the source NE and the sink NE.
Double-click the NE in the topology view on the right, and select the source NE
(NE1) and sink NE (NE2). Double-clicking the NE again can cancel the selection.
Or, you can directly click <Browse> for selection.
The selected source NE is represented by , and the sink NE by .
4 Click Set Route Timeslot, set the Timeslot of the trail to 1, and click <OK>.
Select Auto-Calculation, the route information is displayed in the route
information table, and the trail marked with an arrow appears between the
source NE and sink NE in the topology view on the right.
5 Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the following parameters.
Name: NE1-NE2-VC4 Server Trail-0001
ID: 1
6 Select Activated and Copy after Creation, and then click <Apply>. A dialog
box is displayed to prompt that the trail is created successfully. Click <Close>.
7 In the Copy dialog box, set the following parameters and click <Add>.
Source: NE1-12-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)-2 to NE1-12-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)-8
Sink: NE2-7-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)-2 to NE2-7-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)-8
8 Check the Appointed Timeslot check box, and set the start timeslot of these
seven VC-4s to 2. Set Suffix start number to the trail name to 2. Click <OK> to
finish the creation of the second to eighth VC-4 trails.
9 Repeat Steps 18 to create the first to eighth VC-4 server trails between
adjacent NEs: NE2 and NE3, NE3 and NE4, NE4 and NE1. Repeat Steps 18 to
create the first to fourth VC-4 server trails between NE4 and NE5.

2. Creating a VC-12 Trail
Follow the steps below to create an E1 trail.
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Trail View] from the Main Topology.
2 Select [Trail/SDH Trail Creation] from the Main Menu of the Trail View to display
the trail creation view. Set the following parameters.
Direction: Bidirectional
Level: VC12
Resource Usage Strategy: Protected Resource
Protection Priority Strategy: Trail Protection First
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-30
Step Action
3 Select the source and the sink. Create the service of each NE according to
Figure 1-7.
Double-click the icon of NE1 in the topology view on the right. In the Create
Trail-Select Board Port-Source-NE1 dialog box, click the PQ1 board in slot 2
on the NE Panel, select port 1 and then click <OK>.
4 Double-click the icon of NE2. In the Create Trail-Select Board Port-Sink-NE2
dialog box, click the PQ1 board in slot 2 on the NE Panel, select port 1 and
then click <OK>.
5 Double-click the icon of NE4 to specify that the backup route provided by the
system does not pass through NE4. The appears in the upper of NE4.
It is optional. You can specify the route not to pass through a certain NE with
this method to ensure routing direction conforms to the requirement. It is
usually not selected.
6 Click <Set Route Timeslot>. When the Set Route Timeslot dialog box is
displayed, click the option box under Timeslot to select timeslot 1[1-1-1] for
E1 on VC4, and then click <OK>.
7 Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the following parameters.
Name: NE1-NE2-VC12-0001
ID: 1
8 Check the Activated and Copy after Creation check boxes to allow the
duplication of other 31 E1 services from NE1 to NE2 after the creation of this E1
timeslot. Click <Apply>.
9 When the Copy dialog box is displayed, set the following parameters and click
<Add>.
Source: NE1-2 (PQ1)-2NE1-2 (PQ1)-32
Sink: NE2-2 (PQ1)-2NE2-2 (PQ1)-32
10 Check the Appointed Timeslot check box to set the start timeslot of these 31
E1s on the VC4 to 2: 2-1-1. Then set Suffix start number to the trail name to
2. Check the activate check box and click <OK>.
11 Repeat Steps 210 to create the E1 service from NE1 to NE3 and NE1 to NE4,
and then the E1 service between any two nodes of NE2, NE3, NE4, and NE5 in
turn.

3. Creating a VC-3 Trail
Follow the steps below to create a VC-3 trail.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-31
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/SDH Trail Creation] from the Main Menu to display the trail creation
view, and Set the following parameters:
Direction: Bidirectional
Level: VC3
Resource Usage Strategy: Protected Resource
Protection Priority Strategy: Trail Protection First
2 Create the VC3 service of NE4NE5 according to Figure 1-7. Select the source
and the sink.
Double-click the icon of NE4 in the topology view on the right. In the Create
Trail-Select Board Port-Source-NE4 dialog box, click the PL3 board in slot 14
on the NE Panel, select port 1 and then click <OK>.
3 Double-click the icon of NE5 in the topology view on the right. In the Create
Trail-Select Board Port-Sink-NE5 dialog box, click the PL3 board in slot 14 on
the NE Panel, select port 1 and then click <OK>.
4 Click <Set Route Timeslot> and the Set Route Timeslot dialog box is
displayed. Select the option box under Timeslot and select timeslot 1 for this
VC3 service on VC-4. Click <OK>.
5 Check the Activated and Copy after Creation check boxes to allow the
duplication of other two VC3 services from NE4 to NE5 after the creation of this
VC3 timeslot. Click <Apply>.
6 When the Copy dialog box is displayed, set the following parameters and click
<Add>.
Source: NE4-14-PL3-2(SDH_TU-2) to NE4-14-PL3-3(SDH_TU-3)
Sink: NE5-14-PL3-2(SDH_TU-2) to NE5-14-PL3-3(SDH_TU-3)
7 Check the Appointed Timeslot check box to set the start timeslot of these two
VC3 services on the VC4 to 2, and click <OK> to create the other two VC3
trails.

1.4.11 Configuring SDH and PDH Services by Using the Station Function

Note:
When using the station function to configure services, you only need to configure
cross-connections on NE1NE5 in turn rather than configuring VC-4 server trails.
Skip this section if the SDH or PDH service has been configured by using the trail
function.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-32
Note:
The OptiX OSN 3500 is taken as an example to describe this procedure. For the OptiX
OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, station configuration is performed in the same
way, except that the boards configured, slots and timeslots are different.

1. Creating an Add or Drop Service on NE1
Follow the steps below to create an add or drop service on NE1.
Step Action
1 Select the NE1 icon on the Main Topology and then select [Configuration/NE
Explorer] from the Main Menu.
2 Select the operation object NE1 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the Function Tree. Click the
double-right-arrow button.
3 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service from NE1 to NE2: from ports
132 of the PQ1 board in slot 2 to timeslots 132 of the first VC-4 on the SL16
board in slot 12.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 2-PQ1
Source Timeslot: 132
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4: VC4-1
Sink Timeslot: 132
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.
4 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service from NE1 to NE3: from ports
3363 of the tributary board in slot 2 to timeslots 3363 of the first VC-4 on the
optical interface board in slot 12.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 2-PQ1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-33
Step Action
Source Timeslot: 3363
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4: VC4-1
Sink Timeslot: 3363
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.
5 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service from NE1 to NE4: from ports
132 of the tributary board in slot 3 to timeslots 132 of the second VC-4 on the
optical interface board in slot 7.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 3-PQ1
Source Timeslot: 1-32
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4: VC4-2
Sink Timeslot: 132
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

2. Creating a Pass-Through Service on NE2

Note:
In the NE Explorer, clicking the switching NE shortcut icon can switch an NE
quickly. Select the NE that you wish to configure, and click <OK>.

Follow the steps below to create a pass-through service on NE2.
Step Action
1 Select the NE2 icon on the Main Topology and then select [Configuration/NE
Explorer] from the Main Menu.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-34
Step Action
2 Select the operation object NE2 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the Function Tree. Click the
double-right-arrow button.
3 According to Figure 1-7, configure the pass-through service at NE2 between
NE1 and NE3: from timeslots 3363 of the first VC-4 on the optical interface
board SL16 in slot 7 to timeslots 3363 of the first VC-4 on the optical interface
board SL16 in slot 12.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 7-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Timeslot: 3363
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4: VC4-1
Sink Timeslot: 3363
Activate immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

3. Creating an Add or Drop Service on NE2
Follow the steps below to create an add or drop service on NE2.
Step Action
1 Select the NE2 icon on the Main Topology and then select [Configuration/NE
Explorer] from the Main Menu.
2 Select the operation object NE2 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the Function Tree. Click the
double-right-arrow button.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-35
Step Action
3 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service from NE1 to NE2: from ports
132 of the tributary board in slot 2 to timeslots 132 of the first VC-4 on the
optical interface board in slot 7.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 7-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Timeslot: 132
Sink Slot: 2-PQ1
Sink Timeslot: 132
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

4. Creating an Add or Drop Service on NE3
Follow the steps below to create an add or drop service on NE3.
Step Action
1 Select the NE3 icon on the Main Topology and then select [Configuration/NE
Explorer] from the Main Menu.
2 Select the operation object NE3 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the Function Tree. Click the
double-right-arrow button.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-36
Step Action
3 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service from NE1 to NE3: from timeslots
3363 of the first VC-4 on the optical interface board SL16 in slot 7 to ports
3363 of the PQ1board in slot 2.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 7-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Timeslot: 3363
Sink Slot: 2-PQ1
Sink Timeslot: 3363
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.
4 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service between NE3 and NE5: from
ports 132 of the PQ1 board in slot 2 to timeslots 132 of the first VC-4 on the
SL16 board in slot 12.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 2-PQ1
Source Timeslot: 132
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4: VC4-1
Sink Timeslot: 132
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

5. Creating a Pass-Through Service on NE4
Follow the steps below to create a pass-through service on NE4.
Step Action
1 Select the NE4 icon on the Main Topology and then select [Configuration/NE
Explorer] from the Main Menu.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-37
Step Action
2 Select the operation object NE4 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the Function Tree. Click the
double-right-arrow button.
3 According to Figure 1-7, configure the pass-through service at this station
between NE3 and NE5: from timeslots 132 of the first VC-4 on the optical
interface board SL16 in slot 7 to timeslots 132 of the first VC-4 on the optical
interface board SL4 in slot 13.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 7-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Timeslot: 132
Sink Slot: 13-N2SL4-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4: VC4-1
Sink Timeslot: 132
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

Note:
When configuring E1 services between a node on a chain and another node on a ring,
configure VC-12 rather than VC-4 passthrough on the interconnecting node .
Otherwise, services from ring to chain have no protection.

6. Creating an Add or Drop Service on NE4
Follow the steps below to create an add or drop service on NE4.
Step Action
1 Select the NE4 icon on the Main Topology and then select [Configuration/NE
Explorer] from the Main Menu.
2 Select the operation object NE4 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the Function Tree. Click the
double-right-arrow button.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-38
Step Action
3 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service from NE4 to NE5: from ports
3363 of the PQ1 board in slot 2 to timeslots 3363 of the first VC-4 on the SL4
board in slot 13.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 2-PQ1
Source Timeslot: 3363
Sink Slot: 13-N2SL4-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4: VC4-1
Sink Timeslot: 3363
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.
4 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service from NE4 to NE1: from ports
132 of the tributary board in slot 2 to timeslots 132 of the second VC-4 on the
optical interface board in slot 12.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 2-PQ1
Source Timeslot: 132
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4: VC4-2
Sink Timeslot: 132
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-39
Step Action
5 According to Figure 1-7, create the E3 service from NE4 to NE5: from ports 13
of the PL3 board in slot 14 to timeslots 13 of the second VC-4 on the SL4
board in slot 13.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC3
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 14-PL3
Source Timeslot: 13
Sink Slot: 13-N2SL4-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4: VC4-2
Sink Timeslot: 13
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

7. Creating an Add or Drop Service on NE5
Follow the steps below to create an add or drop service on NE5.
Step Action
1 Select the NE5 icon on the Main Topology and then select [Configuration/NE
Explorer] from the Main Menu.
2 Select the operation object NE5 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the Function Tree. Click the
double-right-arrow button.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-40
Step Action
3 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service between NE3 and NE5: from
timeslots 132 of the first VC-4 on the optical interface board SL4 in slot 7 to
timeslots 132 of the PQ1 board in slot 2.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 7-N2SL4-1(SDH-1)
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Timeslot: 132
Sink Slot: 2-PQ1
Sink Timeslot: 132
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.
4 According to Figure 1-7, create the E1 service between NE4 and NE5: from
timeslots 3363 of the first VC-4 on the optical interface board SL4 in slot 7 to
timeslots 3363 of the PQ1 board in slot 2.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 7-N2SL4-1(SDH-1)
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Timeslot: 3363
Sink Slot: 2-PQ1
Sink Timeslot: 3363
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-41
Step Action
5 According to Figure 1-7, create the E3 service from NE4 to NE5: from ports 13
of the second VC-4 on the optical interface board in slot 7 to timeslots 13 of
the PL3 board in slot 14.
Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box.
Level: VC3
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 7-SL4-1(SDH-1)
Source VC4: VC4-2
Source Timeslot: 13
Sink Slot: 14-PL3
Sink Timeslot: 13
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

1.4.12 Configuring Board Level Protection
Configure board level protection for each NE according to Table 1-4.
1. Configuring TPS Protection
Follow the steps below to configure TPS protection.
Step Action
1 Select the NE1 icon on the Main Topology and then select [Configuration/NE
Explorer] from the Main Menu.
2 Select the operation object NE1 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/TPS Protection] from the Function Tree.
3 Click <Create> and set the following parameters in the Create SDH TPS
Protection Group dialog box.
Protection Board: 1-PQ1
Working board: 2-PQ1, 3-PQ1
Enable Protection Switching: Enable (by default)
WTR Time (s): 600
Switching Priority: Priority-1 for 2-PQ1, Priority-2 for 3-PQ1
4 Click <OK>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-42
2. Configuring Board 1+1 Protection

Note:
The cross-connect board protection pair and SCC board protection pair of the OptiX
OSN 3500 can be configured automatically. To configure 1+1 protection for other
boards, refer to the following method. For the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN
1500, board 1+1 protection is configured in a way similar to the OptiX OSN 3500.

Follow the steps below to configure board 1+1 protection.
Step Action
1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select the operation object NE1 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/Board 1+1 Protection] from the Function Tree.
3 For the cross-connect board protection pair, confirm the following settings.
1+1 Protection Type: Cross-connect Protection Pair
Primary Board: 9-GXCSA
Secondary Board: 10-GXCSA
4 For the SCC board protection pair, confirm the following settings.
1+1 Protection Type: Main Control Protection Pair
Primary Board: 18-GSCC
Secondary Board: 17-GSCC


1.4.13 Configuring Orderwire
1. Configuring Orderwire for NE1NE3
Follow the steps below to configure orderwire for NE1NE3.
Step Action
1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select the operation object NE1 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/Orderwire] from the Function Tree.
3 Select the General tab and set the following parameters according to Figure
1-9.
Call Waiting Time(s): 9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-43
Conference Call: 9999
Phone 1: 1001
Selected Orderwire Port: 7-N2SL16-1,12-N2SL16-1
Click <Apply>.

4 Select the Conference Call tab and set the following parameters.
Selected Conference Call: 7-N2SL16-1, 12-N2SL16-1
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat Steps 14 to configure orderwire for NE2 and NE3 respectively. For
orderwire phone numbers of NE2 and NE3, see Figure 1-9.

2. Configuring Orderwire for NE4
Follow the steps below to configure orderwire for NE4.
Step Action
1 Right-click the NE4 icon on the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select the operation object NE4 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/Orderwire] from the Function Tree.
3 Select the General tab and set the following parameters according to Figure
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-44
1-9.
Call Waiting Time(S): 9
Conference Call: 9999
Phone 1: 1004
Selected Orderwire Port: 7-N2SL16-1, 13-N2SL4-1
Click <Apply>.
4 Select the Conference Call tab and set the following parameters.
Selected Conference Call Optical Interface: 7-N2SL16-1, 13-N2SL4-1
Click <Apply>.

Note:
Do not make a loop when configuring conference call to avoid howler tone. In this
example, choose only one line board on the ring as the selected orderwire port.

3. Configuring Orderwire for NE5
Follow the steps below to configure orderwire for NE5.
Step Action
1 Right-click the NE4 icon on the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer]
2 Select the operation object NE4 from the Object Tree and select
[Configuration/Orderwire] from the Function Tree.
3 Select the General tab and set the following parameters according to Figure
1-9.
Call Waiting Time(s): 9
Conference Call: 9999
Phone 1: 1005
Selected Orderwire Port: 7-N2SL4-1
Click <Apply>.
4 Select the Conference Call tab and set the following parameters.
Selected Conference Call: 7-N2SL4-1
Click <Apply>.


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-45
1.4.14 Setting the Performance Monitoring Start or Stop Status

Note:
Usually, you can take the default value for all performance parameters, and you only
need to start performance monitoring. You can also set performance parameters as
required.

Follow the steps below to set the performance monitoring start or stop status.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/NE Time Synchronization] from the Main Menu.
2 Select NE1NE5 from the Object Tree and click the double-right-arrow button
(red).
3 Set the Synchronous Mode of NE1NE5 to NM, and click <Apply>.
4 Select NE1NE5, right-click and select [Synchronize with NM Time] from the
shortcut menu. Click <Yes> in the confirmation box that appears.
5 A dialog box is displayed and prompts that synchronization succeeded. Click
<OK>.
6 Select [Performance/NE Performance Monitor Time] from the Main Menu.
7 Select NE1 and click the double-right-arrow button (red).
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-46
Step Action
8 Set the following parameters.
Set 15-minute Monitoring: Open
Set 24-hour Monitoring: Open
Start time: set as required and must be later than the current time of the NM and
NE.
Click <Apply>.

9 Repeat Steps 78 to configure performance parameters for NE2NE5.

1.4.15 Setting Alarm Parameters

Note:
Usually, you can take the default value for all alarm parameters except Dumping
Conditions. You can also set alarm parameters according to the actual situations. For
details, refer to descriptions of alarm settings in T2000 Online Help.

Follow the steps below to set alarm parameters.
Step Action
1 Select [System Administration/Database Management/Dump] from the Main
Menu.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-47
Step Action
2 Select the Dumping Condition tab and select an alarm event.
For the record type needing periodic dump, set Dump Periodically or Not to
Yes. Take the default value for Dump Interval (Days) and Time Limit (Days
Before), but you can set them according to the actual situations.
Take the default value for other parameters.

3 Click <OK>.

1.4.16 Backing Up NE Configuration Data
Follow the steps below to back up NE configuration data.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Configuration Data Management] from the Main Menu.
2 Select NE1NE5 from the Object Tree and click the double-right-arrow button
(red).
3 Select NE1NE5 and click <Backup NE Database>. Click <OK> in the
confirmation box that appears.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring SDH and PDH Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1-48
Step Action
4 A dialog box is displayed and prompts that backup succeeded. Click <Close>.


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-1
2 Configuring Services in Other
Protection Schemes
This chapter describes service configuration methods in other protection schemes,
focusing on the difference from the configuration of MSP ring with non-protection
chain.
The protection schemes include:
SNCP Ring with Non-Protection Chain
Four-Fiber MSP Ring with Non-Protection Chain
SNCP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain
SNCP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain
Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain
Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-2
2.1 Networking Diagram
Figure 2-1 illustrates the networking diagram.
STM-16
T2000
STM-4
NE1 (A)
NE2 (B)
NE3 (C)
NE4 (D) NE5 (E)
B D
25 km
35 km 30 km
40 km
80 km

Figure 2-1 Networking diagram

Figure 2-2 shows the timeslot allocation between NEs.
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3 NE4 NE1
12-SL16-1
NE1
t2:33-63 t2:33-63
VC12:33-63
1#VC4
t2:1-32
2#VC4
t2:1-32 t2:1-32
VC12:1-32
7-SL16-112-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
Forward
NE5 NE4
13-SL4-1
1#VC4
t2:1-32
2#VC4
VC3:1-3
t14:1-3 t14:1-3
7-SL4-1
Ring
Line
Add/Drop
VC12:1-32
VC12:1-32
Station

Figure 2-2 Timeslot allocation diagram

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-3
Note:
In this chapter, the OptiX OSN 3500 is taken as an example. For the OptiX OSN
2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, timeslot allocation and protection configuration are
performed in the same way, except that the boards are inserted in different slots.

2.2 Protection Schemes
Table 2-1 shows the differences between MSP ring with non-protection chain and
other protection schemes in service configuration.
Table 2-1 Configuration differences between MSP ring with non-protection chain and other protection
schemes
Protection scheme Difference
SNCP ring with non-protection chain For rings, there is no need to create a
protection subnet.
For details, refer to section 2.3 SNCP Ring
with Non-Protection Chain.
Four-fiber MSP ring with
non-protection chain
For rings, create a four-fiber MSP protection
subnet. For details, refer to section 2.4
Four-Fiber MSP Ring with Non-Protection
Chain.
SNCP ring with 1+1 linear MSP
chain
For rings, there is no need to create a
protection subnet. For chains, create a 1+1
linear MSP chain. For details, refer to section
2.5 SNCP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain.
SNCP ring with 1:1 linear MSP
chain
For rings, there is no need to create a
protection subnet. For chains, create a 1:1
linear MSP chain. For details, refer to section
2.6 SNCP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain.
Two-fiber MSP ring with 1+1 linear
MSP chain
For rings, create a two-fiber MSP protection
subnet. For chains, create a 1+1 linear MSP
chain. For details, refer to section 2.7
Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP
Chain.
Two-fiber MSP ring with 1:1 linear
MSP chain
For rings, create a two-fiber MSP protection
subnet. For chains, create a 1:1 linear MSP
chain. For details, refer to section 2.8
Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP
Chain.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-4
2.3 SNCP Ring with Non-Protection Chain
In the example described in Chapter 1, if the ring formed by NEs 14 is configured
as an SNCP ring, configure the SDH service directly without the need to create the
protection subnet. Create the protection subnet for non-protection chain in the same
way as described in Chapter 1.
1. SNCP Signaling Traffic Flow
We take 32 x E1 services between NE3 and NE5 as an example to analyze the
signaling traffic flow on a topology of SNCP ring with non-protection chain. See
Figure 2-2.
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
Services f rom NE3 to NE5
Services f rom NE5 to NE3
Dual fed
Dual fed
2-PQ1
12-SL16-1
7-SL16-1
12-SL16-1
7-SL16-1
12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
12-SL16-1
7-SL16-1
2-PQ1 13-SL4-1
Selectively receiving

Figure 2-3 E1 signaling traffic flow on SNCP ring with non-protection chain

As shown in Figure 2-3, the services from NE3 to NE5 are sent east (12-SL16-1)
and west (7-SL16-1) bidirectionally at NE3. At NE4, the services from the primary
ring or the secondary ring are received selectively and then pass through to the
chain of NE5 (13-SL4-1). At NE5, the E1 service from NE3 is received.
The services from NE5 to NE3 are sent east (12-SL16-1) and west (7-SL16-1)
bidirectionally at NE4. At NE4, the services from the primary ring or the secondary
ring are received selectively and then sent to the tributary board at NE5.
The services on the SNCP ring need to be configured manually, including
unidirectional dual-fed service, SNCP selectively-receiving service, primary ring
pass-through service and secondary ring pass-through service.
2. Configuring SDH Services
According to the signaling traffic flow on the SNCP ring, you can configure the
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-5
services of each NE as shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Service configuration of each NE (SNCP ring with non-protection chain)
NE Service to be configured Operation
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
2-PQ1 (132) to 7-SL16 (VC4-2: 132)
2-PQ1 (132) to 12-SL16 (VC4-2:
132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
NE1NE4
SNCP selectively-receiving service:
7-SL16 (VC4-2: 132) or 12-SL16
(VC4-2: 132) to 2-PQ1 (132)
Click <Create SNCP> in the SDH
service configuration window and
create SNCP selectively-receiving
services.
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
2-PQ1 (3363) to 7-SL16 (VC4-1:
3363)
2-PQ1 (3363) to 12-SL16 (VC4-1:
3363)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
NE1NE3
SNCP selectively-receiving service:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 3363) or 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 3363) to 2-PQ1 (3363)
Click <Create SNCP> in the SDH
service configuration window and
create SNCP selectively-receiving
services.
NE1
Pass-through
service
The services from NE3 to NE5 pass
through NE1 bidirectionally:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) and 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window to create SDH
bidirectional pass-through services.
The services from NE1 to NE4 pass
through NE2 bidirectionally:
7-SL16 (VC4-2: 132) and 12-SL16
(VC4-2: 132)
The services from NE1 to NE3 pass
through NE2 bidirectionally:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 3363) and 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 3363)
NE2 Pass-through
service
The services from NE3 to NE5 pass
through NE2 bidirectionally:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) and 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH bidirectional pass-through
services.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-6
NE Service to be configured Operation
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
2-PQ1 (132) to 7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132)
2-PQ1 (132) to 12-SL16 (VC4-1:
132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
NE3NE5
SNCP selectively-receiving service:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) or 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132) to 2-PQ1 (132)
Click <Create SNCP> in the SDH
service configuration window and
create SNCP selectively-receiving
services.
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
2-PQ1 (3363) to 7-SL16 (VC4-1:
3363)
2-PQ1 (3363) to 12-SL16 (VC4-1:
3363)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
NE3NE1
SNCP selectively-receiving service:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 3363) or 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 3363) to 2-PQ1 (3363)
Click <Create SNCP> in the SDH
service configuration window and
create SNCP selectively-receiving
services.
NE3
Pass-through
service
The services from NE1 to NE4 pass
through NE3 bidirectionally:
7-SL16 (VC4-2: 132) and 12-SL16
(VC4-2: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH bidirectional pass-through
services.
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
2-PQ1 (132) to 7-SL16 (VC4-2: 132)
2-PQ1 (132) to 12-SL16 (VC4-2:
132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
NE4 NE4NE1
SNCP selectively-receiving service:
7-SL16 (VC4-2: 132) or 12-SL16
(VC4-2: 132) to 2-PQ1 (132)
Click <Create SNCP> in the SDH
service configuration window and
create SNCP selectively-receiving
services.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-7
NE Service to be configured Operation
NE4-NE5 Bidirectional service
14-PL3 (13) and 13-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH bidirectional add or drop
services.
The services from NE3 to NE5 pass
through NE4 bidirectionally:
Dual-fed service
13-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) to 7-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
13-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) to 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
SNCP selectively-receiving service:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) or 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132) to 13-SL4 (VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
Click <Create SNCP> in the SDH
service configuration window and
create SNCP selectively-receiving
services.
NE4
Pass-through
service
The services from NE1 to NE3 pass
through NE4 bidirectionally:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 3363) and 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 3363)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH bidirectional pass-through
services.
NE5NE4 Bidirectional service
14-PL3 (13) and 7-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
NE5
NE5NE3 Bidirectional service
2-PQ1 (132) and 7-SL4 (VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH bidirectional add or drop
services.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-8
2.4 Four-Fiber MSP Ring with Non-Protection Chain
This section describes the difference in configuration between a four-fiber and a
two-fiber MSP ring with non-protection chain described in Chapter 1.
The contents include:
Configuring boards Covered in this section.
Creating fibers Covered in this section.
Configuring a four-fiber MSP
ring
Covered in this section.
Configuring SDH services Refer to section 1.4.10 Create SDH and PDH
Services for service configuration on the ring.

1. Configuring Boards
Compared with a two-fiber MSP ring, the four-fiber MSP ring needs to be configured
with double optical interface boards and fibers. Extra SL16 optical interface boards
need to be configured in NE1NE4 respectively (see Figure 2-1).
Table 2-3 Configuration of extra optical interface boards in NE1NE4
NE Available configuration Configuration to be added
NE1 7 slot-SL16, 12 slot-SL16 8 slot-SL16, 11 slot-SL16
NE2 7 slot-SL16, 12 slot-SL16 8 slot-SL16, 11 slot-SL16
NE3 7 slot-SL16, 12 slot-SL16 8 slot-SL16, 11 slot-SL16
NE4 7 slot-SL16, 12 slot-SL16 8 slot-SL16, 11 slot-SL16

Note:
Table 2-3 shows the board configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500. For the OptiX OSN
2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, you only need to add two line optical interface
boards to corresponding slots. The OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500
supports one four-fiber MSP ring only.

2. Creating Fibers
You need to create four fibers for a four-fiber MSP ring. 7 slot-SL16 and 12 slot-SL16
correspond to two working fibers S1 and S2, and 8 slot-SL16 and 11 slot-SL16
correspond to two standby fibers P1 and P2.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-9
3. Configuring a Four-Fiber MSP Ring
Follow the steps below to configure a four-fiber MSP ring.
Step Operation
1 Select [Configuration/Protection View] from the Main Menu.
2 Select [Protection View/Create SDH Protection Subnet/4f_MSP SPRing]
from the Main Menu to open Wizard for Creating Four-Fiber Bidirectional
MS Shared Protection Ring.
3 Set the following parameters.
Name: 4f_MS_SPRing_1
Rate: STM-16
4 Double-click the icons of NE1NE4 in turn on the topology view on the right
to add them into the protection subnet. Click <Next>.
5 Confirm link information and click <Finish>.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed and indicates operation
succeeded. Click <Close>.

Refer to section 1.4.8 Creating a Protection Subnet for the creation and
configuration of the non-protection chain.
4. Configuring SDH Services
Analyze the signaling traffic flow on the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring formed by
NE1NE4 and configure the service of each NE as shown in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 Service configuration of each NE on the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring
NE Service to be configured Operation
NE1NE3 Bidirectional service: 2-PQ1 (3363) and
12-SL16 (VC4-1: 3363)
NE1
NE1NE4 Bidirectional service: 2-PQ1 (132) and
7-SL16 (VC4-2: 132)
NE2 Services from NE1 to
NE3 pass through
NE2
Bidirectional service: 7-SL16 (VC4-1:
3363) and 12-SL16 (VC4-1: 3363)
NE3NE1 Bidirectional service: 2-PQ1 (3363) and
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 3363)
NE3
NE3NE5 Bidirectional service: 2-PQ1 (132) and
12-SL16 (VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration
window and create SDH
bidirectional services.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-10
NE Service to be configured Operation
NE4NE1 Bidirectional service: 2-PQ1 (132) and
12-SL16 (VC4-2: 132)
NE4NE5 Bidirectional service:
14-PL3 (13) and 13-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
NE4
Services from NE3 to
NE5 pass through
NE4
Bidirectional service:
13-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) and 7-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
NE5NE4 Bidirectional service:
14-PL3 (13) and 7-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration
window and create SDH
bidirectional services.
NE5
NE5NE3 Bidirectional service:
2-PQ1 (132) and 7-SL4 (VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration
window and create SDH
bidirectional services.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-11
2.5 SNCP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain
This section describes the configuration differences from that described in section
2.3 SNCP Ring with Non-Protection Chain.
The contents include:
Configuring boards Covered in this section.
Creating fibers Covered in this section.
Configuring linear MSP 1+1 Covered in this section.
Configuring SDH services Refer to section 2.3 SNCP Ring with
Non-Protection Chain for service configuration
on the ring. This section focuses on the service
configuration on the chain.

1. Configuring Boards
Compared with the non-protection chain, double optical interface boards and fibers
need to be configured for linear MSP 1+1. For example, extra optical interface
boards need to be configured in NE4 and NE5 respectively (see Figure 2-1).
Table 2-5 Configuration of extra optical interface boards in NE4 and NE5
NE Available configuration Configuration to be added
NE4 13 slot-SL4 6 slot-SL4
NE5 7 slot-SL4 12 slot-SL4

Note:
Table 2-5 shows the board configuration for the OptiX OSN 3500. For the OptiX OSN
2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500, you only need to add one line optical interface board
to the corresponding slot.

2. Creating Fibers
Compared with the non-protection chain, four fibers need to be created for linear
MSP 1+1.
3. Configuring Linear MSP 1+1
Follow the steps below to configure linear MSP 1+1 subnet.
Step Operation
1 Select [Configuration/Protection View] from the Main Menu.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-12
Step Operation
2 Select [Protection View/Create SDH Protection Subnet/Linear MSP 1+1]
from the Main Menu to open Wizard for Creating Linear MS 1+1 Protection
Chain.
3 Set the following parameters.
Name: Linear 1+1_MSP_1
Level: STM-4
Revertive Mode: Non-Revertive
Switching Mode: Unidirectional
4 Double-click NE4 and NE5 icons in turn in the topology view on the right to
add them to the protection subnet. Click <Next>.
5 Confirm link information and click <Finish>.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed and indicates operation
succeeded. Click <Close>.

4. Configuring SDH Services
When the chain is configured as linear MSP 1+1 single-ended switching, the
signaling traffic flow is as shown in Figure 2-4.
Protection switching is performed in the following way: The transmit end sends
services to the working channel and the protection channel simultaneously. Normally,
the receive end receives the services from the working channel. When switching is
triggered, the receive end switches to receive the services from the protection
channel.
2-PQ1/14-PL3
7-SL16
13-SL4
Working channel
Protection channel
Legend:
NE4 NE5
6-SL4
12-SL16
From ring
7-SL16
12-SL16
13-SL4
6-SL4
7-SL4
7-SL4
12-SL4
12-SL4

Figure 2-4 Signaling traffic flow on the SNCP with 1+1 linear MSP chain

According to the signaling traffic flow on the chain, the service of each NE is
configured as shown in Table 2-6.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-13
Table 2-6 Service configuration of each NE (SNCP ring with 1+1 linear MSP chain)
NE Service to be configured Operation
NE1 The same with SNCP configuration
NE2 The same with SNCP configuration
NE3 The same with SNCP configuration
NE4NE1 The same with SNCP configuration
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
14-PL3 (13) to 13-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
14-PL3 (13) to 6-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
NE4NE5
Unidirectional receiving service:
13-SL4 (VC4-2: 13) to 14-PL3 (13)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional services.
Services from
NE1 to NE3
pass through
NE4
The same with SNCP configuration
SNCP selectively-receiving service:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) or 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132) to 13-SL4 (VC4-1:
1-32)
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) or 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132) to 6-SL4 (VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create SNCP> in the SDH
service configuration window and
create SNCP services.
NE4
Services from
NE3 to NE5
pass through
NE4
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
13-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) to 7-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
13-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) to 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
14-PL3 (13) to 7-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
14-PL3 (13) to 12-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
NE5NE4
Unidirectional receiving service:
7-SL4 (VC4-2: 13) to 14-PL3 (13)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional services.
NE5
NE5NE3 Unidirectional dual-fed service:
2-PQ1 (132) to 7-SL4 (VC4-1: 132)
2-PQ1 (132) to 12-SL4 (VC4-1:
132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-14
NE Service to be configured Operation
NE5 NE5NE3 Unidirectional receiving service:
7-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) to 2-PQ1 (132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH bidirectional services.

Note:
For OptiX OSN products, when configured as a 1+1 protection chain, you need to
configure services for the working channel and the protection channel at the transmit
end manually, and configure only the working channel at the receive end.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-15
2.6 SNCP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain
This section describes the differences in configuration compared with SNCP with
non-protection chain described in section 2.3.
The contents include:
Configuring boards Refer to section 2.5.1 Configuring Boards".
Creating fibers Refer to section 2.5.2 Creating Fibers.
Configuring linear MSP 1:1 Covered in this section.
Configuring SDH services Refer to SNCP for service configuration on the
ring. This section focuses on the service
configuration on the chain.

1. Configuring a 1:1 Linear MSP Subnet
Follow the steps below to configure a 1:1 linear MSP subnet.
Step Operation
1 Select [Configuration/Protection View] from the Main Menu.
2 Select [Protection View/Create SDH Protection Subnet/Linear MSP M:N]
from the Main Menu to open Wizard for Creating Linear MS M:N
Protection Chain.
3 Set the following parameters.
Name: M:N_MSP_1
Level: STM-4
M:N = 1:1
4 Double-click NE4 and NE5 icons in turn in the topology view on the right to
add them to the protection subnet. Click <Next>.
5 Confirm link information and click <Finish>.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed and indicates operation
succeeded. Click <Close>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-16
2. Configuring SDH services
When the service on the chain is configured as 1:1 linear MSP, the signaling traffic
flow is as shown in Figure 2-5.
7-SL16
13-SL4
Working channel
Protection channel
Legend:
NE4 NE5
7-SL16
12-SL16
12-SL16
13-SL4
6-SL4
6-SL4
7-SL4
7-SL4
12-SL4
12-SL4

Figure 2-5 Signaling traffic flow on the SNCP with 1:1 linear MSP chain

Protection switching is performed in the following way: Normally, services are sent
and received over the working channel. When switching is triggered, the MSP
switching protocol is started to switch the service on the working channel to the
protection channel. There is no need to configure the protection channel.
According to the signaling traffic flow on the chain, the service of each NE is
configured as shown in Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 Service configuration of each NE (SNCP with 1:1 linear MSP chain)
NE Service to be configured Operation
NE1 The same with SNCP configuration
NE2 The same with SNCP configuration
NE3 The same with SNCP configuration
NE4NE1 The same with SNCP configuration
NE4NE5 Bidirectional service:
14-PL3 (13) and 13-SL4 (VC4-2:
13)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH bidirectional services.
NE4
Services from
NE1 to NE3 pass
through NE4
The same with SNCP configuration
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-17
NE Service to be configured Operation
NE4 Services from
NE3 to NE5 pass
through NE4
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
13-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) to 7-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
13-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) to 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
SNCP selectively-receiving service:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) or 12-SL16
(VC4-1: 132) to 13-SL4 (VC4-1:
132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH unidirectional dual-fed
services.
Click <Create SNCP> in the SDH
service configuration window and
create SNCP services.
NE5NE4 Bidirectional service:
14-PL3 (13) and 7-SL4 (VC4-2:
13)
NE5
NE5NE3 Bidirectional service:
2-PQ1 (132) and 7-SL4 (VC4-1:
132)
Click <Create> in the SDH service
configuration window and create
SDH bidirectional services.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-18
2.7 Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain
This section focuses on the configuration of MSP ring with 1+1 linear MSP chain.
The configuration of MSP ring is the same as that of MSP ring described in Chapter1.
The configuration of 1+1 linear MSP chain is the same as that described in section
2.5 SNCP Ring with 1+1 Linear MSP Chain.
The contents include:
Configuring boards Refer to section 2.5.1 Configuring Boards".
Creating fibers Refer to section 2.5.2 Creating Fibers".
Configuring linear MSP 1+1 Refer to section 2.5.3 Configuring Linear MSP
1+1".
Configuring SDH services Refer to MSP configuration in Chapter 1 for service
configuration on the ring. This section focuses on
service configuration on the chain.

When the service on the chain is configured as 1+1 linear MSP single-ended
switching, the signaling traffic flow is as shown in Figure 2-6.
7-SL16
13-SL4
6-SL4 7-SL4
7-SL4
12-SL4
13-SL4
Working channel
Protection channel
7-SL16
Legend:

Figure 2-6 Signaling traffic flow on the MSP with 1+1 linear MSP chain

According to the signaling traffic flow on the chain, the service of each NE is
configured as shown in Table 2-8.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-19
Table 2-8 Service configuration of each NE (MSP with 1+1 linear MSP chain)
NE Service to be configured Operation
NE1 The same with MSP configuration
NE2 The same with MSP configuration
NE3 The same with MSP configuration
NE4NE1 The same with MSP configuration
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
14-PL3 (13) to 13-SL4 (VC4-2:
13)
14-PL3 (13) to 6-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration window
and create SDH unidirectional
dual-fed services.
NE4NE5
Unidirectional receiving service:
13-SL4 (VC4-2: 13) to 14-PL3
(13)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration window
and create SDH unidirectional
services.
NE4
Services from NE3
to NE5 pass
through NE4
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) to 13-SL4
(VC4-1: 132)
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) to 6-SL4
(VC4-1: 132)
Unidirectional receiving service:
13-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) to 7-SL16
(VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration window
and create SDH unidirectional
services.
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
14-PL3 (13) to 7-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
14-PL3 (13) to 12-SL4 (VC4-2:
13)
NE5NE4
Unidirectional receiving service:
7-SL4 (VC4-2: 13) to 14-PL3 (13)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration window
and create SDH unidirectional
services.
Unidirectional dual-fed service:
2-PQ1 (132) to 7-SL4 (VC4-1:
132)
2-PQ1 (132) to 12-SL4 (VC4-1:
132)
NE5
NE5NE3
Unidirectional receiving service:
7-SL4 (VC4-1: 132) to 2-PQ1
(132)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration window
and create SDH unidirectional
services.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-20
2.8 Two-Fiber MSP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain
This section focuses on the configuration of MSP ring with 1:1 linear MSP chain. The
configuration of MSP ring is the same as that of MSP ring described in Chapter1.
The configuration of 1:1 linear MSP chain is the same as that described in section
2.6 SNCP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chain.
The contents include:
Configuring boards Refer to section 2.5.1 Configuring Boards".
Creating fibers Refer to section 2.5.2 Creating Fibers".
Configuring linear MSP 1:1 Refer to section 2.6.1 Configuring a Linear MSP
1:1 Subnet.
Configuring the SDH services Refer to MSP for service configuration on the
ring. This section focuses on service
configuration on the chain.

When the service on the chain is configured as linear MSP 1:1, the signaling traffic
flow is as shown in Figure 2-7.
7-SL16
13-SL4 7-SL4
12-SL4
Working channel
Protection channel
Legend:
NE4 NE5
6-SL4
7-SL16
13-SL4
6-SL4
7-SL4
12-SL4

Figure 2-7 Signaling traffic flow on the MSP ring with 1:1 linear MSP chain

Since in 1:1 linear MSP protection, no service is configured on the protection channel,
the service configuration of each NE is as shown in Table 2-9.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring Services in Other Protection Schemes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
2-21
Table 2-9 Service configuration of each NE (MSP with 1:1 linear MSP chain)
NE Service to be configured Operation
NE1 The same with MSP configuration
NE2 The same with MSP configuration
NE3 The same with MSP configuration
NE4NE1 The same with MSP configuration
NE4NE5 Bidirectional service:
14-PL3 (13) and 13-SL4 (VC4-2:
13)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration window
and create SDH bidirectional
services.
NE4
Services from NE3 to
NE5 pass through
NE4
Bidirectional service:
7-SL16 (VC4-1: 132) to 13-SL4
(VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration window
and create SDH bidirectional
services.
NE5NE4 Bidirectional service:
14-PL3 (13) and 7-SL4 (VC4-2: 13)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration window
and create SDH services.
NE5
NE5NE3 Bidirectional service:
2-PQ1 (132) to 7-SL4 (VC4-1: 132)
Click <Create> in the SDH
service configuration window
and create SDH services.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-1
3 Configuring Ethernet Services
This chapter describes the process of configuring Ethernet private line (EPL) and
Ethernet private local area network (EPLn) services on the T2000, and related
engineering requirements and engineering information as well.
The configuration of Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) and Ethernet virtual private
local area network (EVPLn) will be introduced with resilient packet ring (RPR) in
Chapter 4.
Through this example, you can learn how to configure EPL and other similar services.
The following table is a mapping table which associates the Ethernet services to the
Ethernet boards of the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.
Table 3-1 Mapping between Ethernet boards and Ethernet services
Ethernet
services
Board
EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN
EFT8 Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
EGT2 Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
EFS4 Supported Supported Supported Supported
EFS0 Supported Supported Supported Supported
EGS2 Supported Supported Supported Supported

The contents include:
Configuring the Point-to-Point EPL Service
Configuring the PORT Shared EPL Service
Configuring the VCTRUNK Shared EPL Service
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-2
Configuring the EPLn Service

Note:
In this chapter, the OptiX OSN 3500 is taken as an example. For the OptiX OSN 2500
and OptiX OSN 1500, service configuration is performed in the same way. The only
difference is that the boards are inserted in different slots.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-3
3.1 Configuring the Point-to-Point EPL Service
3.1.1 Engineering Requirements
The two companies A and B in NE1 need to transmit data services to NE5 through
multi-service transport platform (MSTP) equipment. The services of A and B are
required to be completely isolated. Both A and B provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical
interfaces. A requires 10 Mbit/s bandwidth, B requires 40 Mbit/s bandwidth, and their
interconnected equipment does not support VLAN, as shown in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 Service requirement of each station
User Service
requirement
Source station
(number of
ports occupied)
Sink station
(number of
ports occupied)
Bandwidth
A Point-to-point NE1 (1) NE5 (1) 10 Mbit/s
B Point-to-point NE1 (1) NE5 (1) 40 Mbit/s

3.1.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the above
requirements and the engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the
following engineering information:
Networking Diagram
Board Information of Each NE
Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Timeslot Allocation Diagram
1. Networking Diagram
Figure 3-1 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-4
STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring
T2000
STM-4 two-fiber
bidirectional non-
protection chain
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
A B
A B
VC-Trunk
PORT1 PORT2
PORT1
PORT2

Figure 3-1 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

2. Board Information of Each NE
Ethernet boards need to be added according to the added service type and traffic
volume. NE1 and NE5 are added with one N1EFS4 board respectively. Other NEs
remain unchanged. Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3 show the board layout of NE1 and NE5
respectively.
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
D
7
5
S
P
I
U
A
U
X
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
P
Q
1
P
Q
1
P
Q
1
P
Q
1
S
L
1
6
S
L
1
6
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
N
1
E
F
S
4

Figure 3-2 Board layout of NE1

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-5
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
P
Q
1
S
L
4
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
C
3
4
S
P
L
3
N
1
E
F
S
4

Figure 3-3 Board layout of NE5

3. Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Figure 3-4 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1 and NE5.
VC4-4:VC12-1~VC12-5
PORT1
A
10M
40M
B
VCTRUNK PORT
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VC-4-1:VC-3-1
SDH
VC4-4:VC12-1~VC12-5
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VC-4-1:VC-3-1
PORT1
A
10M
40M
B
PORT
PORT2
NE1
NE5

Figure 3-4 Service configuration diagram

Note:
Only VC4-4 can be used when the N1EFS0 and N1EFS4 boards are bounded with a
path at VC-12 level.

Table 3-3 shows the Ethernet service connection table.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-6
Table 3-3 Ethernet service connection table
Service
Attribute
A B
Source NE NE1 NE1
Source board - port 13-N1EFS4-1 13-N1EFS4-2
Source time slot range VC4-4: VC12-1VC12-5 VC4-1: VC3-1
Source VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
Working mode of source
PORT
Auto negotiation Auto negotiation
TAG flag of source PORT Access Access
VLAN ID of source PORT 1 2
Bound bandwidth 5 x VC-12 1 x VC-3
Sink NE NE5 NE5
Sink board - port 15-N1EFS4-1 15-N1EFS4-2
Sink time slot range VC4-4: VC12-1VC12-5 VC4-1: VC3-1
Sink VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
Working mode of sink PORT Auto negotiation Auto negotiation
TAG flag of sink PORT Access Access
VLAN ID of sink PORT 1 2

4. Timeslot Allocation Diagram
Figure 3-5 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-7
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3
NE4 NE1
12-SL16-1
NE1
7-SL16-112-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
Forward
NE5
NE4
13-SL4-1 7-SL4-1
Ring
Chain
Add/Drop
VC-4-3
13-EFS4: VC4-4
VC-12: 1-5
VC-4-4
13-EFS4: VC-4-1
VC-3: 1
VC-4-3
VC-4-4
15-EFS4: VC4-4
VC-12: 1-5
15-EFS4: VC-4-1
VC-3: 1
Station

Figure 3-5 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services

3.1.3 Configuration Process(by Station)
Table 3-4 shows the process of configuring the point-to-point EPL service on the
T2000.
Table 3-4 Process of point-to-point EPL service configuration
Stage Description Remarks
1 Creating a board
2 Configuring Ethernet interfaces
3 Configuring binding paths
4 Creating the point-to-point EPL service
5 Configuring committed access rate (CAR) Optional
6 Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-8
1. Creating a Board
Follow the steps below to create a board.
Step Action
1 In the Main Topology, double click the NE1 icon to open the NE panel.
2 Right click slot 13 according to the board layout shown in Figure 3-2, and
select N1EFS4" from the shortcut menu.
3 Make sure that the N1EFS4 board has been configured in slot 13 and click
<Close>.
4 Repeat steps 13 to create the Ethernet board of NE5. Figure 3-3 shows the
board layout of NE5.

2. Configuring NE1 Data

Note:
Refer to the NM online help for the meaning of each parameter during service
configuration.

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1 Right click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select 13-N1EFS4 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then click .
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-9
Step Action
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 and
PORT2 to Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the TAG Attribute tab. Set the TAG of the PORT1 and PORT2 to
Access.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.


(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration>. Then, the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-10
Step Action
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC12-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-1 to VC12-5 from the available timeslots one by one, and then click
.

4 To configure a binding path for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC3-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1
Select VC3-1 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the point-to-point EPL service
Follow the steps below to create the point-to-point EPL service.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-11
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from the
function tree.
2 Click <New>, and the Create Ethernet Line Service" dialog box is displayed.
3 According to Figure 3-4, perform the following settings to create the EPL service
for A.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT1
Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-12
Step Action
4 Repeat step 3 to create the EPL service for B. Perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT2
Sink Port: VCTRUNK2
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring CAR (optional)
Follow the steps below to configure CAR.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/QoS Management] from the function tree, and then the
"CAR Configuration tab.
2 Click <New>, and the Create CAR dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
CAR ID: 1
Enabled: Enabled
Guaranteed Bandwidth: 10 Mbit/s
Extra Burst Buffer Size: 0
Peak Bandwidth: 20 Mbit/s
Maximum Extra Burst Buffer Size: 0
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-13
Step Action

4 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the dialog box:
CAR ID: 2
Enabled: Enabled
Guaranteed Bandwidth: 40 Mbit/s
Extra Burst Buffer Size: 0
Peak Bandwidth: 50 Mbit/s
Maximum Extra Burst Buffer Size: 0
Click <OK>.
5 Select the Flow Configuration tab.
6 Perform the following settings in the dialog box for PORT1.
Bound CAR: 1

7 Repeat step 6 to set the bound CAR for port 2.
Bound CAR: 2

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-14
(5) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE1 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create>, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-N1EFS4-1
Source VC4: VC4-4
Source Time Slot Range: 15
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-3
Sink Time Slot Range: 15
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-15
Step Action
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-3
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-N1EFS4-1
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Time Slot Range: 1
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-4
Sink Time Slot Range: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.

3. Configuring NE5 Data

Note:
The data configuration of NE5 is the same as that of NE1, except that some
parameters are different.

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE5, and click <OK>.
2 Select 15-N1EFS4 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree. Then, click .
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 and
PORT2 to Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the TAG Attribute tab. Set the TAG of the PORT1 and PORT2 to
Access.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-16
(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration>, and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC12-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-1 to VC12-5 from the available timeslots one by one, and then
click .
4 To configure a binding path for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC3-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1
Select VC3-1 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Click <OK>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-17
(3) Creating the point-to-point EPL service
Follow the steps below to create the point-to-point EPL service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from
the function tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create EPL Service" dialog box is displayed.
3 According to Figure 3-4, perform the following settings to create the EPL
service for A.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT1
Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
Click <Apply>.
4 Repeat step 3 to create the EPL service for B. Perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT2
Sink Port: VCTRUNK2
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring CAR (optional)
Follow the steps below to configure CAR.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/QoS Management] from the function tree and select the
"CAR Configuration" tab.
2 Click <New> and the Create CAR dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-18
Step Action
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
CAR ID: 1
Enable: Enable
Guaranteed Bandwidth: 10 Mbit/s
Extra Burst Buffer Size: 0
Peak Bandwidth: 20 Mbit/s
Maximum Extra Burst Buffer Size: 0
Click <Apply>.
4 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
CAR ID: 2
Enable: Enable
Guaranteed Bandwidth: 40 Mbit/s
Extra Burst Buffer Size: 0
Peak Bandwidth: 50 Mbit/s
Maximum Extra Burst Buffer Size: 0
Click <OK>.
5 Select the Flow Configuration tab.
6 Perform the following settings in the dialog box for PORT1.
Bound CAR: 1
7 Repeat step 6 to set the bound CAR for port 2.
Bound CAR: 2

(5) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE5 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create>, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-19
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 15-N1EFS4-1
Source VC4: VC4-4
Source Time Slot Range: 15
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL4-1
Sink VC4: VC4-3
Sink Time Slot Range: 15
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-3
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-N1EFS4-1
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Time Slot Range: 1
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL4-1
Sink VC4: VC4-4
Sink Time Slot Range: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.

4. Configuring NE4 Data
The Ethernet service of NE4 to be configured is pass-through service. Follow the
steps below to configure NE4 data.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE4, and click <OK>.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create>, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-20
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Source VC4: VC4-3
Source Time Slot Range: 15
Sink Slot: 13-N1SL4-1
Sink VC4: VC4-3
Sink Time Slot Range: 15
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-3
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Source VC4: VC4-4
Source Time Slot Range: 1
Sink Slot: 13-N1SL4-1
Sink VC4: VC4-4
Sink Time Slot Range: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

3.1.4 Configuration Process (by Trail)

Note:
Ethernet service can be created by trail or by station. If you purchase the license with
trail management function, you can create Ethernet service by trail; otherwise, you
can only create Ethernet service by station.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-21
Table 3-5 shows the process of creating point-to-point EPL service on the T2000.
Table 3-5 Process of creating point-to-point EPL service (by trail)
Step Action Remarks
1 Create a server trail Refer to section 1.4.9 of chapter 1
2 Create a trunk link
3 Create an EPL trail

1. Create a Trunk Link
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Trunk Link Creation] from the main menu.
2 Set bandwidth to 5 x VC12 in the pop-up interface.
3
Double click the source NE (NE1) and select the N1EFS4 board, then select VCTRUNK port
1 and select VC4:4-VC12:1VC4:4-VC12:5 for available timeslot. Click <OK>.

4
Double click the sink NE (NE5) and select N1EFS4, then select VCTRUNK port 1 and
VC4:4-VC12:1VC4:4-VC12:5 for available slot. Click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-22
Step Action
5
Select the Activate check box, and leave default setting for others.

6 Click <Apply> to create the trunk link from NE1 to NE5 of user A.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-23
Step Action
7
Repeat steps 27 to create the trunk link from NE1 to NE5 of user B.


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-24
2. Create an EPL Trail
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Ethernet Trail Creation/EPL Creation] from the main menu.
2 Set source parameters in the pop-up interface.
Port Usage Strategy: Port
Click <Browse> and select a proper source line port: PORT1.
Set sink parameters.
Port Usage Strategy: Port
Click <Browse> and select a proper source line port: PORT1.
Trunk Link Route Strategy: Use Existing Trunk Links.
Select Trunk_Link-0001 with bandwidth being 5 x VC12.
Click <Next>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-25
Step Action

3 Set port attributes in the pop-up interface.
For PORT1 of NE1:
TAG: Access
Enable port: Enable
Set PORT1 of NE5 similarly.
4 Click <Finish>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-26
Step Action
5 Repeat steps 14 to create EPL service of user B similarly.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-27
3.2 Configuring the PORT Shared EPL Service
3.2.1 Engineering Requirements
The headquarters of company C is located in NE1, with two branches (M&S
Department and Technical Support Department) located in NE5. The headquarters
needs to communicate with two branches. The service of the two branches is required
to be isolated completely, each occupying 10 Mbit/s bandwidth. The Ethernet switch of
company C provides 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical interfaces. The Ethernet switch of
headquarters supports virtual local area network (VLAN), but the interconnected
equipment of the two branches does not.
3.2.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the above
requirements and the engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the
following engineering information:
Networking Diagram
Board Information of Each NE
Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Timeslot Allocation Diagram
1. Networking Diagram
Figure 3-6 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.
T2000
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
A B
A B
VC-Trunk
PORT1 PORT2
PORT1 PORT2
PORT3 PORT4
C(2) C(1)
C (Headquarters)
PORT3

Figure 3-6 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

2. Board Information of Each NE
NE1 and NE5 do not require any new board.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-28
3. Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Figure 3-7 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1 and NE5.
VC4-4:VC12-1~VC12-5
PORT1
A
10M
40M
B
VCTRUNK PORT
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VC-4-1:VC-3-1
SDH
VC4-4:VC12-1~VC12-5
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VC-4-1:VC-3-1
PORT1
A
10M
40M
B
PORT
PORT2
NE1 NE5
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
PORT3
C1
10M
10M
C2
PORT4
VC4-4:VC12-6~VC12-10
VC4-4:VC12-11~VC12-15
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
VC4-4:VC12-6~VC12-10
VC4-4:VC12-11~VC12-15
PORT3
C

Figure 3-7 Service configuration diagram

Table 3-6 shows the Ethernet service connection table.
Table 3-6 Ethernet service connection table
Service
Attribute
C
Source NE NE1
Source board - port 13-N1EFS4-3
Source time slot range VC4-4: VC12-6VC12-10 VC4-4:
VC12-11VC12-15
Source VCTRUNK VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4
Working mode of source
PORT
Auto negotiation Auto negotiation
TAG flag of source PORT Tag aware Tag aware
Source VLAN ID 3 4
Bound bandwidth 5 x VC-12 5 x VC-12
Sink NE NE5
Sink board - port 15-N1EFS4-3 15-N1EFS4-4
Sink time slot range VC4-4: VC12-6VC12-10 VC4-4:
VC12-11VC12-15
Sink VCTRUNK VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4
Working mode of sink PORT Auto negotiation Auto negotiation
TAG flag of sink PORT Access Access
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-29
Service
Attribute
C
Sink VLAN ID 3 4

4. Timeslot Allocation Diagram
The SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services is shown in Figure 3-8.
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3
NE4 NE1
12-SL16-1
NE1
7-SL16-112-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
NE5
Station NE4
13-SL4-1 7-SL4-1
Ring
Chain
VC-4-3
13-EFS4: VC4-4
VC-12: 6-15
VC-4-3
15-EFS4: VC4-4
VC-12: 6-15

Figure 3-8 Timeslot allocation diagram

3.2.3 Configuration Process(by Station)
Table 3-7 shows the process of configuring the PORT shared Ethernet EPL service on
the T2000.
Table 3-7 Process of PORT shared EPL service configuration
Stage Description Remarks
1 Creating a board Not required in this section
2 Configuring Ethernet interfaces
3 Configuring binding paths
4 Creating the PORT shared EPL service
5 Configuring CAR It is optional.
6 Configuring the cross-connect from
Ethernet boards to SDH line boards


Note:
The configuration of the PORT shared EPL service is the same as that of the
point-to-point EPL service, except that the Ethernet service configuration on NE1 and
interface attributes are different.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-30
1. Configuring NE1 Data
(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1 Right click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select 13-N1EFS4 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree. Then, click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT3 to
Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the TAG Attribute tab. Set the TAG of the PORT3 to Tag aware.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click<Configuration>, and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK3, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK3
Level: VC12-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-6 to VC12-10 from the available timeslots one by one, and then
click .
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-31
Step Action
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK4, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK4
Level: VC12-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-11 to VC12-15 from the available timeslots one by one, and then
click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the PORT shared EPL service
Follow the steps below to create the PORT shared EPL service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from
the function tree.
2 Click <New>, and the Create Ethernet Leased Line Service" dialog box is
displayed.
3 According to Figure 3-7, perform the following settings to create the service
from C to C1.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT3
VLAN ID of source port: 3
Sink Port: VCTRUNK3
VLAN ID of sink port: 3
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-32
Step Action
4 Repeat step 3 to create the service from C to C2. Perform the following
settings in the dialog box.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT3
VLAN ID of source port: 4
Sink Port: VCTRUNK4
VLAN ID of sink port: 4
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE1 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create>, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-N1EFS4-1
Source VC4: VC4-4
Source Time Slot Range: 615
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-3
Sink Time Slot Range: 615
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-33
Step Action


2. Configuring NE5 Data

Note:
The data configuration of NE5 is performed in the similar way, except that some
parameters are different.

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE5, and click <OK>.
2 Select 15-N1EFS4 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then click
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-34
Step Action
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT3 and
PORT4 to Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the TAG Attribute tab. Set the TAG of the PORT3 and PORT4 to
Access. Set the Default VLAN ID of the PORT3 to 3. Set the Default
VLAN ID of the PORT4 to 4.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click<Configuration>, and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK3, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK3
Level: VC12-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-6 to VC12-10 from the available timeslots one by one, and then
click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK4, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK4
Level: VC12-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-11 to VC12-15 from the available timeslots one by one, and then
click .
Click <OK>.
(3) Creating the PORT shared EPL service
Follow the steps below to create the PORT shared EPL service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-35
Step Action
the function tree.
2 Click <New>, and the Create Ethernet Leased Line Service" dialog box is
displayed.
3 According to Figure 3-7, perform the following settings to create the service
from C1 to C.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT3
VLAN ID of source port: 3
Sink Port: VCTRUNK3
VLAN ID of sink port: 3
Click <Apply>.
4 Repeat step 3 to create the service from C2 to C. Perform the following
settings in the dialog box.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT4
VLAN ID of source port: 4
Sink Port: VCTRUNK4
VLAN ID of sink port: 4
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE5 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create>, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-36
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 15-N1EFS4-1
Source VC4: VC4-4
Source Time Slot Range: 6-15
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL4-1
Sink VC4: VC4-3
Sink Time Slot Range: 6-15
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

3. Configuring NE4 Data
The Ethernet service of NE4 to be configured is pass-through service. Follow the
steps below to configure NE4 data.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE4, and click <OK>.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create>, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Source VC4: VC4-3
Source Time Slot Range: 615
Sink Slot: 13-N1SL4-1
Sink VC4: VC4-3
Sink Time Slot Range: 615
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-37
3.2.4 Configuration Process (by Trail)

Note:
Ethernet service can be created by trail or by station. If you purchase the license with
trail management function, you can create Ethernet service by trail; otherwise, you
can only create Ethernet service by station.

Table 3-8 shows main procedures of creating PORT shared EPL service on the
T2000.

Table 3-8 Main procedures of creating PORT-shared EPL service (by trail)
Procedure Description Remarks
1 Creating a server trail Refer to section 1.4.9 of Chapter 1
2 Creating a trunk link
3 Creating an EPL trail

1. Creating a Trunk Link
Follow the steps below to create a trunk link.
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Trunk Link Creation] from the main menu.
2 Set bandwidth to 5 x VC12 in the interface displayed.
3 Click <Browse>, select the source NE (NE1), and click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-38
Step Action
4 In the pop-up interface, select the N1EFS4 board, then select VCTRUNK port 3 and select
VC4:4-VC12:6VC4:4-VC12:10 for available timeslot.

5 Double click the sink NE (NE5). In the pop-up interface, select N1EFS4, VCTRUNK port 3 and
VC4:4-VC12:6VC4:4-VC12:10 for available slot.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-39
Step Action
6 Select the Activate check box, and leave the default setting for others.

7 Click <Apply> to create the trunk link from C of NE1 to C1 of NE5.
8 Repeat steps 27 to create the trunk link from C of NE1 to C2 of NE5.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-40
2. Creating an EPL Trail
Follow the steps below to create an EPL trail.
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Ethernet Trail Creation/EPL Creation] from the main menu.
2 Set source parameters in the pop-up interface.
Port Usage Strategy: Port+VLAN
Click <Browse> and select a proper source line port: PORT3.
VLAN ID: 3
Set sink parameters.
Port Usage Strategy: Port+VLAN
Click <Browse> and select a proper source line port: PORT3
VLAN ID: 3.
Trunk Link Route Strategy: Use Existing Trunk Links.
Select Trunk_Link-0003 with bandwidth being 5 x VC12.
Click <Next>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-41
Step Action

3 Set port attributes in the pop-up interface.
For PORT3 of NE1:
TAG: Tag Aware
Enable Port: Enable
For PORT3 of NE5:
TAG: Access
Enable Port: Enable
Select the Activate check box.
4 Click <Finish>.
5 Repeat steps 14 to create an EPL trail from C of NE1 to C2 of NE5.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-42
Step Action

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-43
3.3 Configuring the VCTRUNK Shared EPL Service
3.3.1 Engineering Requirements
D and D are users of integrated intelligent communities and located in NE2 and NE3
respectively. They need to communicate with each other. E and E are users of large
corporations and located in NE2 and NE3 respectively. They also need to
communicate with each other. Services of communities and that of corporations are
isolated completely. Because the traffic peak of community services is at night and
that of corporation services is in daytime, they can share a 300 Mbit/s bandwidth.
Their Ethernet equipment provides GE optical interfaces but does not support VLAN.
3.3.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the above
requirements and the engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the
following engineering information.
Networking Diagram
Board Information of Each NE
Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Timeslot Allocation Diagram
1. Networking Diagram
Figure 3-9 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.
T2000
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
D
VC-Trunk
PORT1
PORT2
PORT2 PORT1
E
D
E

Figure 3-9 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

2. Board Information of Each NE
Ethernet boards need to be added according to the added service type and traffic
volume. NE2 and NE3 are added with one N1EGS2 board respectively. Other NEs
remain unchanged. Figure 3-10 shows the board layout of NE2 and NE3.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-44
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
P
Q
1
N
2
S
L
1
6
N
2
S
L
1
6
S
C
C
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
N
1
E
G
S
2

Figure 3-10 Board layout of NE2 and NE3

3. Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Figure 3-11 shows the service configuration of NE2 and NE3.
PORT1
D
300M
E
VCTRUNK MAC
PORT2
SDH
VC4-1:VC3-1~VC3-3
VC4-2:VC3-1~VC3-3
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
D
E
MAC
PORT2
NE2 NE3
300M
300M
300M
VC4-1:VC3-1~VC3-3
VC4-2:VC3-1~VC3-3
VCTRUNK1

Figure 3-11 Service configuration diagram

Table 3-9 shows the Ethernet service connection table.
Table 3-9 Ethernet service connection table
Service
Attribute
D E
Source NE NE2
Source board - port 13-N1EGS2-1 13-N1EGS2-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-45
Service
Attribute
D E
Source time slot range VC4-1: VC3-1 to VC3-3
VC4-2: VC3-1 to VC3-3
Source VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1
Working mode of source PORT 1000M full duplex 1000M full duplex
TAG flag of source PORT Access Access
VLAN ID of source PORT 1 2
Bound bandwidth 6 x VC-3
Sink NE NE3
Sink board - port 13-N1EGS2-1 13-N1EGS2-2
Sink time slot range VC4-1: VC3-1 to VC3-3
VC4-2: VC3-1 to VC3-3
Sink VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1
Working mode of sink PORT 1000M full duplex 1000M full duplex
TAG flag of sink PORT Access Access
VLAN ID of sink PORT 1 2

4. Timeslot Allocation Diagram
Figure 3-12 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3
NE4 NE1
12-SL16-1
NE1
7-SL16-112-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
Forward
Ring
Add/Drop
VC-4-3
13-EGS2: VC4-1
VC-3: 1-3
VC-4-4
13-EGS2: VC4-2
VC-3: 1-3

Figure 3-12 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-46
3.3.3 Configuration Process(by Station)
Table 3-10 shows the process of configuring the VCTRUNK shared EPL service on
the T2000.
Table 3-10 Process of VCTRUNK shared EPL service configuration
Stage Description Remarks
1 Creating a board
2 Configuring Ethernet interfaces
3 Configuring binding paths
4 Creating the VCTRUNK shared EPL service
5 Configuring CAR It is optional.
6 Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet
boards to SDH line boards


1. Creating a Board
Follow the steps below to create a board.
Step Action
1 In the Main Topology, double click the NE2 icon to open the NE panel.
2 Right click slot 13 according to the board layout of NE1 shown in Figure
3-10, and select N1EGS2".
3 Make sure the N1EGS2 board is configured in slot 13, and click <Close>.
4 Repeat steps 13 to create the Ethernet board of NE3. Figure 3-10 shows
the board layout of NE3.

2. Configuring NE2 Data

Note:
Refer to the NM online help for the meaning of each parameter during service
configuration.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-47
(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1 Right click the NE2 icon in the Main Topology, and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select 13-N1EGS2 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet
Interface Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then
click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 and
PORT2 to Enabled. Set the Working mode of the PORT1 and PORT2 to
1000M full duplex. Click <Apply>.
Select the TAG Attribute tab. Set the TAG of the PORT1 and PORT2 to
Access. Set the Default VLAN ID of the PORT1 to 1. Set the Default
VLAN ID of the PORT2 to 2.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click<Configuration>, and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC3-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1
Select VC3-1 to VC3-3 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Available Resources: VC4-2
Select VC3-1 to VC3-3 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-48
Step Action

(3) Creating the VCTRUNK shared EPL service
Follow the steps below to create the VCTRUNK shared EPL service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from
the function tree.
2 Click <New>, and the Create Ethernet Line Service" dialog box is displayed.
3 According to Figure 3-11, perform the following settings to create the service
of D.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT1
VLAN ID of source port: 1
Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
VLAN ID of sink port: 1
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-49
Step Action

4 Repeat step 3 to create the service of E. Perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT2
VLAN ID of source port: 2
Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
VLAN ID of sink port: 2
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-50
Step Action
1 Select NE2 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create>, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-3
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-N1EGS2-1
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Time Slot Range: 13
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-3
Sink Time Slot Range: 13
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-51
Step Action
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-3
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-N1EFS4-1
Source VC4: VC4-2
Source Time Slot Range: 13
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-4
Sink Time Slot Range: 13
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

3. Configuring NE3 Data

Note:
The data configuration of NE3 is the same as that of NE2.

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE3, and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-N1EGS2 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet
Interface Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then
click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 and
PORT2 to Enabled. Set the Working mode of the PORT1 and PORT2 to
1000M full duplex. Click <Apply>.
Select the TAG Attribute tab. Set the TAG of the PORT1 and PORT2 to
Access. Set the Default VLAN ID of the PORT1 to 1. Set the Default
VLAN ID of the PORT2 to 2.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-52

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration>, and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC3-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1
Select VC3-1 to VC3-3 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Available Resources: VC4-2
Select VC3-1 to VC3-3 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the VCTRUNK shared EPL service
Follow the steps below to create the VCTRUNK shared EPL service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from
the function tree.
2 Click <New>, and the Create Ethernet Line Service" dialog box is displayed.
3 According to Figure 3-11, perform the following settings to create the EPL
service for D.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT1
VLAN ID of source port: 1
Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
VLAN ID of sink port: 1
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-53
Step Action
4 Repeat step 3 to create the EPL service for E. Perform the following settings
in the dialog box.
Service Type: EPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT2
VLAN ID of source port: 2
Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
VLAN ID of sink port: 2
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE3 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create>, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-3
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-N1EGS2-1
Source VC4: VC4-1
Source Time Slot Range: 13
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-3
Sink Time Slot Range: 13
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-54
Step Action
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-3
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-N1EFS4-1
Source VC4: VC4-2
Source Time Slot Range: 13
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-4
Sink Time Slot Range: 13
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

3.3.4 Configuration Process (by Trail)

Note:
Ethernet service can be created by trail or by station. If you purchase the license with
trail management function, you can create Ethernet service by trail; otherwise, you
can only create Ethernet service by station.

Table 3-11 shows the process of creating VCTRUNK shared EPL service on the
T2000.
Table 3-11 Process of creating VCTRUNK-shared EPL service (by trail)
Step Action Remarks
1 Create a server trail Refer to section
1.4.9 of chapter 1
2 Create a trunk link
3 Create an EPL trail

1. Create a Trunk Link
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Trunk Link Creation] from the main menu.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-55
Step Action
2 Set bandwidth to 6 x VC3 in the pop-up interface.
3 Click <Browse>, select the source NE (NE2), and click <OK>.
4 In the pop-up interface, select the N1EGS2 board, then select VCTRUNK port 1, 1 and 2 for
higher order and VC4:1-VC3:1VC4:1-VC3:3 and VC4:2-VC3:1VC4:2-VC3:3 for available
timeslot. Click <OK>

5 Double click the sink NE (NE3). In the pop-up interface, select N1EGS2, VCTRUNK port 1, 1
and 2 for higher order, and VC4:1-VC3:1VC4:1-VC3:3 and VC4:2-VC3:1VC4:2-VC3:30 for
available slot.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-56
Step Action
6 Select the Activate check box, and leave the default setting for others.

7 Click <Apply> to create the trunk link from NE2 to NE3 shared by users D, D, E, and E.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-57
2. Create an EPL Trail
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Ethernet Trail Creation/EPL Creation] from the main menu.
2 Set source parameters in the pop-up interface.
Port Usage Strategy: Port+VLAN
Click <Browse> and select a proper source line port: PORT1.
VLAN ID: 1
Set sink parameters.
Port Usage Strategy: Port+VLAN
Click <Browse> and select a proper source line port: PORT1
VLAN ID: 1.
Trunk Link Route Strategy: Use Existing Trunk Links.
Select the trunk link with bandwidth being 6 x VC3
Click <Next>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-58
Step Action

3 Set port attributes in the pop-up interface.
For PORT1 of NE2:
TAG: Access
Enable Port: Enable
For PORT1 of NE3:
TAG: Access
Enable Port: Enable
Select the Activate check box.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-59
Step Action
4 Click <Finish> to create the EPL trail from D of NE2 to D of NE3.
5 Repeat steps 14 to create an EPL trail from E of NE2 to E of NE3.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-60
3.4 Configuring the EPLn Service
3.4.1 Engineering Requirements
Company F has three branches located in NE2, NE3 and NE4 respectively. The
information needs to be shared between the branches, and any two branches can visit
each other. The three branches share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth dynamically. The
Ethernet equipment of company F provides 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interfaces, but does
not support VLAN.
3.4.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the above
requirements and the engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the
following engineering information.
Networking Diagram
Engineering Planning
Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Timeslot Allocation Diagram
1. Networking Diagram
Figure 3-13 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.
T2000
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
B
VC-Trunk
PORT1
PORT1
F1
F2
PORT1
F3
VB
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1
VB
VB
PORT1
VCTRUNK1

Figure 3-13 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

2. Board Information of Each NE
Ethernet boards need to be added according to the added service type and traffic
volume. NE2, NE3 and NE4 are added with one N1EFS0 board respectively. Other
NEs remain unchanged. Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show the board layout of NE2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-61
and NE3, and NE4 respectively.
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
P
Q
1
N
2
S
L
1
6
N
2
S
L
1
6
S
C
C
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
N
1
E
G
S
2
N
1
E
F
S
0
E
T
F
8

Figure 3-14 Board layout of NE2 and NE3

FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
D
7
5
S
P
Q
1
P
Q
1
N
2
S
L
1
6
N
2
S
L
1
6
S
C
C
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
C
3
4
S
S
L
4
P
L
3
E
T
F
8
N
1
E
F
S
0

Figure 3-15 Board layout of NE4

3. Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Figure 3-16 shows the service configuration of NE2, NE3 and NE4.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-62
PORT1
F2
10M
VCTRUNK PORT
SDH
VC4-4:VC12-1~VC12-5
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
F1
PORT
NE3
NE2
10M
VC4-4:VC12-1~VC12-5
VCTRUNK1
VB1
LP1
LP2
LP3
VCTRUNK2
VC4-4:VC12-6~VC12-10
VB1
VC4-4:VC12-1~VC12-5
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
F3
PORT
NE4
10M
VB1
LP1
LP1
LP2
LP2

Figure 3-16 Service configuration diagram

Table 3-12 shows the Ethernet service connection table.
Table 3-12 Ethernet service connection table
Service
Attribute
F
Source NE NE3
Source board - port 14-N1EFS0-1
Source time slot range VC4-4: VC12-1VC12-5 VC4-4:
VC12-6VC12-10
Source VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
Source VCTRUNK attribute PE PE
Working mode of source PORT Auto negotiation
TAG flag of source PORT Access
VLAN ID of source PORT 11
VB VB1
Attached port PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
Sink NE NE2 NE4
Sink board - port 14-N1EFS0-1 15-N1EFS0-1
Sink time slot range VC4-4: VC12-1VC12-5 VC4-4: VC12-1VC12-5
Sink VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
Sink VCTRUNK attribute PE PE
Working mode of sink PORT Auto negotiation Auto negotiation
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-63
Service
Attribute
F
TAG flag of sink PORT Access Access
VLAN ID of sink PORT 11 11
Virtual bridge (VB) VB1 VB1
Attached port PORT1, VCTRUNK1 PORT1, VCTRUNK1

Table 3-13 shows the forwarding filter table of NE2, NE3 and NE4.
Table 3-13 Forwarding filter table
NE name VB VLAN ID Forwarding port
NE2 VB1 11 PORT1, VCTRUNCK1
NE3 VB1 11 PORT1, VCTRUNCK1,
VCTRUNCK2
NE4 VB1 11 PORT1, VCTRUNCK1

4. Timeslot Allocation Diagram
Figure 3-17 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3 NE4 NE1
12-SL16-1
NE1
7-SL16-112-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
Forward
Ring
Add/Drop
VC-4-5
14-EFS0: VC4-4
VC-12: 1-5
15-EFS0: VC4-4
VC-12: 1-5

Figure 3-17 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services

3.4.3 Configuration Process(by Station)
Table 3-14 shows the process of configuring the EPLn service on the T2000.
Table 3-14 Process of EPLn service configuration
Stage Description Remarks
1 Creating a board
2 Configuring Ethernet interfaces
3 Configuring binding paths
4 Creating the EPLn service
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-64
Stage Description Remarks
5 Configuring the VLAN forwarding filter table
6 Configuring CAR It is optional.
7 Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet
boards to SDH line boards


1. Creating a Board
Follow the steps below to create a board.
Step Action
1 In the Main Topology, double click the NE2 icon to open the NE panel.
2 Right click slot 14 according to Figure 3-14, and then select N1EFS0. Right
click slot 31, and then select ETF8.
3 Make sure the N1EFS0 and ETF8 boards is configured in slots 14 and 31, and
then click <Close>.
4 Repeat steps 13 to create the Ethernet board for NE3 and NE4. Figure 3-14
and Figure 3-15 show the board layout of NE3 and NE4 respectively.

2. Configuring NE2 Data

Note:
Refer to the NM online help for the meaning of each parameter during service
configuration.

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1 Right click the NE2 icon in the Main Topology, and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select 14-N1EFS0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then click
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-65
Step Action
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 to
Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the TAG Attribute tab. Set the TAG of the PORT1 to Access. Set the
Default VLAN ID of the PORT1 to 11.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration>, and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC12-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-1 to VC12-5 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-66

(3) Creating the EPLn service
Follow the steps below to create the EPLn service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the function
tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box is displayed.
3 Configure the VB name to VB1.

4 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-67
Step Action
5 Perform the following settings in the dialog box according to the service
configuration diagram of NE2.
Select PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 for available mounted ports, and click
Click <OK>.
6 Click <OK> in the Create Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box.

(4) Configuring the VLAN forwarding filter table
Follow the steps below to configure the forwarding filter table.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the function
tree. Select VLAN tab.
2 Click <New> and the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following configuration in the dialog box.
VB: 1-VB1
VLAN ID: 11
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT1 and VCTRUNK1
Click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-68
Step Action


(5) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE2 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-69
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 14-N1EFS0-1
Source VC4: VC4-4
Source Time Slot Range: 15
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-5
Sink Time Slot Range: 15
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.


3. Configuring NE3 Data

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-70
Note:
The data configuration of NE3 is performed in the same way as that of NE2, except
that some parameters are different.

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE3, and click <OK>.
2 Select 14-N1EFS0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree. Then, click .
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 to
Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the TAG Attribute tab. Set the TAG of the PORT1 to Access. Set the
Default VLAN ID of the PORT1 to 11.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click<Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-71
Step Action
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC-2-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-1 to VC12-5 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC12-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-6 to VC12-10 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the EPLn service
Follow the steps below to create the EPLn service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the function
tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box is displayed.
3 Configure the VB name to VB1.
4 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
5 Perform the following settings in the dialog box according to the service
configuration diagram of NE2.
Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 for Available Mounted Ports, and
click
Click <OK>.
6 Click <OK> in the Create Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box.

(4) Configuring the VLAN Forward Filter Table
Follow the steps below to configure the forwarding filter table.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-72
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the function
tree. Select VLAN tab.
2 Click <New> and the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following configuration in the dialog box.
VB: 1-VB1
VLAN ID: 11
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT1, VCTRUNCK1 and VCTRUNCK2
Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE3 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 14-N1EFS0-1
Source VC4: VC4-4
Source Time Slot Range: 15
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-5
Sink Time Slot Range: 15
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-73
Step Action
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 14-N1EFS0-1
Source VC4: VC4-4
Source Time Slot Range: 610
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-5
Sink Time Slot Range: 15
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

4. Configuring NE4 Data

Note:
The data configuration of NE4 is performed in the same way as that of NE2

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE4, and click <OK>.
2 Select 15-N1EFS0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 to
Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the TAG Attribute tab. Set the TAG of the PORT1 to Access. Set the
Default VLAN ID of the PORT1 to 11.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(2) Configuring binding paths
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-74
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC12-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-4
Select VC12-1 to VC12-5 from the available timeslots, and then click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the EPLn service
Follow the steps below to create the EPLn service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the function
tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box is displayed.
3 Configure the VB name to VB1.
4 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
5 Perform the following settings in the dialog box according to the service
configuration diagram of NE2.
Select PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 for Available Mounted Ports, and click
Click <OK>.
6 Click <OK> in the Create Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box.
(4) Configuring the VLAN forwarding filter table
Follow the steps below to configure the forwarding filter table.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the function
tree. Select VLAN tab.
2 Click <New> and the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following configuration in the dialog box.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-75
VB: 1-VB1
VLAN ID: 11
Selected forwarding ports: PORT1 and VCTRUNCK1
Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE4 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-12
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 15-N1EFS0-1
Source VC4: VC4-4
Source Time Slot Range: 15
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink VC4: VC4-5
Sink Time Slot Range: 15
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-76
3.4.4 Configuration Process (by Trail)

Note:
Ethernet service can be created by trail or by station. If you purchase the license with
trail management function, you can create Ethernet service by trail; otherwise, you
can only create Ethernet service by station.

Table 3-15 shows the process of creating EPLn service on the T2000.
Table 3-15 Process of creating EPLn service (by trail)
Step Action Remarks
1 Create a server trail Refer to section 1.4.9 of chapter 1
2 Create a trunk link
3 Create an EPLn trail

1. Create a Trunk Link
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Trunk Link Creation] from the main menu.
2 Set bandwidth to 5 x VC12 in the pop-up interface.
3 Click <Browse>, select the source NE (NE3), and click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-77
Step Action
4 In the pop-up interface, select the N1EFS0 board, then select VCTRUNK port 1, 4 for higher
order, VC4:4-VC12:1VC4:4-VC12:5 for available timeslot.
5 Double click the sink NE (NE2). In the pop-up interface, select N1EFS0, then select
VCTRUNK port 1, 4 for higher order, and VC4:4-VC12:1VC4:4-VC12:5 for available slot
(lower order).
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-78
Step Action
6 Select the Activate check box, and leave the default setting for others.

7 Click <Apply> to create the trunk link from NE3 to NE2.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-79
Step Action
8 Create the trunk link from NE3 to NE4 similarly.


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-80
2. Create an EPLn Trail
Step Action
1 Select [Trail/Ethernet Trail Creation/EPLn Creation] from the main menu.
2 Set source parameters in the pop-up EPLn creation window.
Double click the nodes(NE2NE4) to be added into the EPLn. In the pop-up
interface, click to select available ports and then click <OK>.

3 Select the trunk link created previously from "Trunk Link Route Strategy and
click <Next>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-81
Step Action

4 Set port attributes in the port attribute setting window.
For PORT1 of NE2, NE3 and NE4:
TAG: Access
Port Enable: Enable

5 Click <Add> in the VLAN configuration window, and configure the following
parameter in the VLAN Configuration for Ethernet Trail window.
VLAN ID: 11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-82
Step Action
Select the PORT and VCTRUNK, click to select the port, and click
<OK>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-83
Step Action
6 Click <Next>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Ethernet Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
3-84
Step Action
7 Set the name to be EPLn, select the Activate check box and click <Finish>.


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-1
4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR
This chapter describes the process of configuring EVPL and EVPLn services on an
RPR ring network on the T2000. In addition, related engineering requirements and
engineering information are introduced. Through this example, you can learn how to
configure RPR services and other similar services.
The RPR processing boards provided by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are the
EMR0 and EGR2. The two RPR boards support EVPL and EVPLAN only.
The contents include:
Configuring EVPL Services on RPR
Configuring EVPLn Services on RPR

Note:
In this chapter, the OptiX OSN 3500 product is taken as an example. For the OptiX
OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, service configuration is performed in the same way.
The only difference is that the boards are inserted in different slots.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-2
4.1 Configuring EVPL Services on RPR
4.1.1 Engineering Requirements
The Ethernet services of A (in NE22), B (in NE33) and C (in NE44) need to be
converged to the central node NE11, and to be interconnected with the backbone
layer Ethernet equipment through GE interfaces. The services of A, B, and C are to be
isolated from one another. The Ethernet equipment of NE11 supports multi-protocol
label switching (MPLS), while that of NE22, NE33, and NE44 do not. The Ethernet
services of B and C are output through FE electrical interfaces, and that of A through
GE optical interfaces. All private line services share 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth and require
protection in RPR mode.
4.1.2 Engineering Planning
Engineering planning is conducted based on the above requirements, and the
following engineering information is output.
Networking Diagram
Board Information of Each NE
Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Timeslot Allocation Diagram
1. Networking Diagram
Figure 4-1 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.
NE33
NE22
Company A
OptiX OSN 3500
Company B
NE11
NE44
RPR
Upper network
GE
2
Company A
Company B
LSP n
Company C
Ethernet port
GE
FE
FE
3
Company C
1

Figure 4-1 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-3
2. Board Information of Each NE
The EMR0 board needs to be configured according to service type and traffic volume.
Figure 4-2 shows the board layout of NE11, NE22, NE33 and NE44.
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
N
2
S
L
1
6
S
C
C
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
E
T
F
8
E
M
R
0
N
2
S
L
1
6

Figure 4-2 Board layout of NE11, NE22, NE33 and NE44
3. Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Figure 4-3 shows the service configuration diagram.
NE33
NE22
OptiX OSN 3500
NE11
NE44
RPR1
Bandwidth: 1.25
Gbit/s
PORT1
A:Tunnel:20
B:Tunnel:30
C:Tunnel:40
Ethernet port
PORT1
VLAN ID:22
PORT2
VLAN ID:33
PORT2
VLAN ID:44
PE
PE
PE
P
0
1
Node ID:1
Node ID: 2
Node ID:3
Node ID:4
RPR1
A:Tunnel:22
B:Tunnel:33
C:Tunnel:44
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
1
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
2
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
1
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
2

Figure 4-3 Service configuration diagram

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-4
Table 4-1 shows the Ethernet service connection table.
Table 4-1 Ethernet service connection table
Service
Attribute
A B C
NE NE11
Node ID 1
Board - port 13-EMR0-1
Working mode of PORT 1000M full duplex
TAG flag of PORT Tag aware
PORT type P
VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
Timeslot VCTRUNK1: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9,
VC4-11, VC4-13, VC4-15
VCTRUNK2: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10,
VC4-12, VC4-14, VC4-16
Bound bandwidth 8 x VC-4
Service type Transit
Port tunnel 20 30 40
RPR1 tunnel 22 33 44
Service
Attribute
A B C
NE NE22 NE33 NE44
Node No. 2 3 4
Board - port 13-EMR0-1 13-EMR0-2 13-EMR0-2
Working mode of PORT 1000M full duplex Auto negotiation Auto negotiation
TAG flag of PORT Tag aware Tag aware Tag aware
VLAN ID of PORT 22 33 44
Port type PE PE PE
VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
Timeslot VCTRUNK1: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9,
VC4-11, VC4-13, VC4-15
VCTRUNK2: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10,
VC4-12, VC4-14, VC4-16
Bound bandwidth 8 x VC-4
Service type EVPL
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-5
Service
Attribute
A B C
RPR1 tunnel 22 33 44
RPR1 VC 25 25 25

4. Timeslot Allocation Diagram
Figure 4-4 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.
Timeslot
NE22
Station
NE33
NE44 NE11
12-SL16-1
NE11
7-SL16-112-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
Ring
Add/Drop
VC-4-1
.
.
.
VC-4-8
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2

Figure 4-4 SDH timeslot allocation diagram

4.1.3 Configuration Process
Table 4-2 shows the process of configuring the EVPL service on RPR on the T2000.
Table 4-2 Process of configuring EVPL service on RPR
Stage Description Remarks
1 Creating a board
2 Configuring Ethernet interfaces
3 Configuring binding paths
4 Creating the EVPL service
5 Configuring RPR parameters
6 Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-6
1. Creating a Board
Follow the steps below to create a board.
Step Action
1 In the Main Topology, double click the NE11 icon to open the NE panel.
2 Right click the corresponding slot according to the board layout of NE11 shown
in Figure 4-2, and select the board.
3 Make sure the board is configured. Then, click <Close>.
4 Repeat steps 13 to create the board for NE22, NE33 and NE44 respectively.
Figure 4-2 shows the board layout.

2. Configuring NE11 Data

Note:
Refer to the NM online help for the meaning of each parameter during service
configuration.

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1 Right click the NE11 icon in the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select 13-EMR0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 to
Enabled. Set the Working mode of the PORT1 to 1000M full duplex. Click
<Apply>.
Select the MPLS tab. Set the Port Type of the PORT1 to P.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-7
The EMR0 board has 13 PORTs. Table 4-3 shows the relation between PORTs and
physical interfaces of the EMR0.
Table 4-3 Relation between PORTs and physical interfaces
PORT Physical interface
PORT1 GE optical interface on the front panel
PORT2 FE1 on the front panel
PORT3 FE2 on the front panel
PORT4 FE3 on the front panel
PORT5 FE4 on the front panel
PORT6 The first interface on the ETF8/EFF8
PORT7 The second interface on the ETF8/EFF8
PORT8 The third interface on the ETF8/EFF8
PORT9 The fourth interface on the ETF8/EFF8
PORT10 The fifth interface on the ETF8/EFF8
PORT11 The sixth interface on the ETF8/EFF8
PORT12 The seventh interface on the ETF8/EFF8
PORT13 The eighth interface on the ETF8/EFF8

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration>, and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
Click .
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-8
Step Action
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resource: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12, VC4-14,
VC4-16
Click .
Click <OK>.

Note:
VCTRUNK1 for the RPR service must be bound with VC-4s all in odd number.
VCTRUNK2 for the RPR service must be bound with VC-4s all in even number.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-9
(3) Creating the EVPL service
Follow the steps below to create the EVPL service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from the
function tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create Ethernet Line Service" dialog box is displayed.
3 According to Figure 4-3, perform the following settings to create the service of
A.
Service Type: Transit
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT1
Source Port Tunnel: 20
Sink Port: RPR1
Sink Port Tunnel: 22
Sink Node: 2
Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-10
Step Action
4 Repeat step 3 to create the service of B. Perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Service Type: Transit
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT1
Source Port Tunnel: 30
Sink Port: RPR1
Sink Port Tunnel: 33
Sink Node: 3
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 3 to create the service of C. Perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Service Type: Transit
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT1
Source Port Tunnel: 40
Sink Port: RPR1
Sink Port Tunnel: 44
Sink Node: 4
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring RPR parameters
Follow the steps below to configure RPR parameters.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/RPR Management/Topology Information] from the
function tree.
2 Perform the following settings in the Local Node Information tab.
Node No.: 1
Node Name: NE11
RPR Enable: Enabled
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-11
Step Action
3 Select the Link Information tab and set bandwidth for various levels of
services on 0 ring and 1 ring.
Used Bandwidth of Priority A: 200
Reserved Bandwidth of Priority A: 100
Used Bandwidth of Priority B-CIR: 100
Click <Apply>.

Note:
Usually, services are of class C. The parameters adopt the default value 0.


Table 4-4 lists the priority of RPR services.
Table 4-4 The priority of RPR services
Service class Bandwidth Reclaimable
A0 Reserved No A
A1 Yes
B-CIR
Allocated
Yes B
B-EIR
C
Opportunistic Yes
Subject to fairness algorithm

The sum of bandwidth for class A0 services on each node is the reserved bandwidth
of RPR. Bandwidth of A0 services is not reclaimable or subject to fairness algorithm
no matter whether the bandwidth is being used.
Bandwidth of class B-CIR services is reclaimable by default. The bandwidth is
reclaimable when it carries no traffic. B-CIR traffic beyond the allocated bandwidth is
subject to the fairness algorithm.
The Used Bandwidth of Priority A is the total bandwidth of class A services, including
the bandwidth for class A0 services. The Reserved Bandwidth of Priority A is the
bandwidth of class A0 services. The Used Bandwidth of Priority B-CIR is the
bandwidth of class B-CIR services. Bandwidth of class A services and B-CIR services
is not subject to the fairness algorithm.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-12
(5) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE11 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-13
Step Action
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

3. Configuring NE22 Data

Note:
The data configuration of NE22 is performed in the same way as that of NE11, except
that some parameters are different.

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE22, and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-EMR0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree. Then, click .
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 to
Enabled. Set the Working mode of the PORT1 to 1000M full duplex. Click
<Apply>.
Select the MPLS tab. Set the Port Type of the PORT1 to PE.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-14
(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration>, and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12, VC4-14,
VC4-16
Click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the EVPL service
Follow the steps below to create the EVPL service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from the
function tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create Ethernet Line Service" dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-15
Step Action
3 According to Figure 4-3, perform the following settings to create the service of
A.
Service Type: EVPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT1
Source Port VLAN ID: 22
Sink Port: RPR1
Sink Port Tunnel: 22
Sink Port VC: 25
Sink Node: 1
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring RPR parameters
Follow the steps below to configure RPR parameters.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/RPR Management/Topology Information] from the
function tree.
2 Perform the following settings in the Local Node Information tab.
Node No.: 2
Node Name: NE22
RPR Enable: Enabled
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(5) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE22 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-16
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

4. Configuring NE33 Data
(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE33, and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-EMR0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT2 to
Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the MPLS tab. Set the Port Type of the PORT2 to PE.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-17
(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in the
dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12, VC4-14,
VC4-16
Click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the EVPL service
Follow the steps below to create the EVPL service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from the
function tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create Ethernet Leased Line Service" dialog box is
displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-18
Step Action
3 According to Figure 4-3, perform the following settings to create the service of
A.
Service Type: EVPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT2
Source Port VLAN ID: 33
Sink Port: RPR1
Sink Port Tunnel: 33
Sink Port VC: 25
Sink Node: 1
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring RPR parameters
Follow the steps below to configure RPR parameters.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/RPR Management/Topology Information] from the
function tree.
2 Perform the following settings in the Local Node Information tab.
Node No.: 3
Node Name: NE33
RPR Enable: Enabled
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(5) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE33 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-19
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

5. Configuring NE44 Data
(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE44, and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-EMR0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT2 to
Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the MPLS tab. Set the Port Type of the PORT2 to PE.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-20
(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11,
VC4-13, VC4-15
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12,
VC4-14, VC4-16
Click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the EVPL service
Follow the steps below to create the EVPL service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet Leased Line Service] from
the function tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create Ethernet Leased Line Service" dialog box is
displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-21
Step Action
3 According to Figure 4-3, perform the following settings to create the service
of A.
Service Type: EVPL
Service Direction: Bidirectional
Source Port: PORT2
Source Port VLAN ID: 44
Sink Port: RPR1
Sink Port Tunnel: 44
Sink Port VC: 25
Sink Node: 1
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring RPR parameters
Follow the steps below to configure RPR parameters.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/RPR Management/Topology Information] from the
function tree.
2 Perform the following settings in the Local Node Information tab.
Node No.: 4
Node Name: NE44
RPR Enable: Enabled
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(5) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE44 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-22
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-23
4.2 Configuring EVPLn Services on RPR
4.2.1 Engineering Requirements
There is Internet access services in residential communities in NE22, NE33 and NE44,
which requires visiting from one another. The services of the three nodes are
converged to NE11 and interconnected with the backbone layer Ethernet equipment
through GE interfaces. There is also public Internet access services in these three
nodes, which also requires visiting from one another, and the services of the three
nodes are also converged to NE11 and interconnected with the backbone layer
Ethernet equipment through GE interfaces. The Ethernet equipment in NE11 supports
MPLS. Internet access services in residential communities and public Internet access
services are required to be isolated, but they can share 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth
dynamically. RPR protection is required on Ethernet service layer and the protection
switching time is less than 50ms.
Internet access services in residential communities include video services and virtual
private network (VPN). Public Internet access services include IP phone and cyber
caf.
4.2.2 Engineering Planning
Engineering planning is conducted based on the above requirements. The following
engineering information is output.
Networking Diagram
Board Information of Each NE
Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Timeslot Allocation Diagram
1. Networking Diagram
Figure 4-5 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-24
NE22
OptiX OSN 3500
NE44
RPR
Internet
GE
Public Community
LSP
Ethernet port
GE
FE FE
FE
GE
FE
FE
NE11
NE33
RPR1

Figure 4-5 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

2. Board Information of Each NE
The EMR0 board needs to be configured according to service type and traffic volume.
Figure 4-6 shows the board layout of NE11, NE22, NE33, and NE44.
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
N
2
S
L
1
6
S
C
C
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
E
T
F
8
E
M
R
0
N
2
S
L
1
6

Figure 4-6 Board layout of NE11, NE22, NE33, and NE44

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-25
3. Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Figure 4-7 shows the service configuration diagram.
NE22
OptiX OSN 3500
RPR
Internet
GE
Public Community
LSP
Ethernet port
NE11
NE33
RPR1
VLAN 1 VLAN 2
VLAN 1
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
VLAN 1 VLAN 1
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
NE44
VB1
VB2
VB1
VB2
VB1 VB2
VB1 VB2

Figure 4-7 Service configuration diagram

The Ethernet service connection table of each NE is shown in Table 4-5, Table 4-6,
Table 4-7 and Table 4-8.
Table 4-5 NE11 Ethernet service connection table
Public Internet access Internet access in residential
community
Service
Attribute
IP call Cyber cafe Video service VPN
Node No. 1
Board - port 13-EMR0-1
Working mode of PORT 1000M full duplex
TAG flag of PORT Tag aware
PORT type P
Timeslot VCTRUNK1: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
VCTRUNK2: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12, VC4-14,
VC4-16
Bound bandwidth 8 x VC-4
VLAN ID 1 2 1 2
VB VB1 VB2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-26
Public Internet access Internet access in residential
community
Service
Attribute
IP call Cyber cafe Video service VPN
PORT tunnel 100 200
RPR1 tunnel 100 200

Table 4-6 NE22 Ethernet service connection table
Public Internet access Internet access in residential
community
Service
Attribute
IP phone Cyber cafe Video service VPN
Node No. 2
Board - port 13-EMR0-2 13-EMR0-3
Working mode of PORT Auto negotiation Auto negotiation
TAG flag of PORT Tag aware Tag aware
PORT type PE PE
Timeslot VCTRUNK1: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
VCTRUNK2: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12, VC4-14,
VC4-16
Bound bandwidth 8 x VC-4
VLAN ID 1 2 1 /
VB VB1 VB2
PORT tunnel 100 200
RPR1 tunnel 100 200

Table 4-7 NE33 Ethernet service connection table
Public Internet access Internet access in residential
community
Service
Attribute
IP phone Cyber cafe Video service VPN
Node No. 3
Board - port 13-EMR0-2 13-EMR0-3
Working mode of PORT Auto negotiation Auto negotiation
TAG flag of PORT Tag aware Tag aware
PORT type PE PE
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-27
Public Internet access Internet access in residential
community
Service
Attribute
IP phone Cyber cafe Video service VPN
Timeslot VCTRUNK1; VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
VCTRUNK2: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12, VC4-14,
VC4-16
Bound bandwidth 8 x VC-4
VLAN ID 1 / 1 2
VB VB1 VB2
PORT tunnel 100 200
RPR1 tunnel 100 200

Table 4-8 NE44 Ethernet service connection table
Public Internet access Internet access in residential
community
Service
Attribute
IP phone Cyber cafe Video service VPN
Node No. 4
Board - port 13-EMR0-2 13-EMR0-3
Working mode of PORT Auto negotiation Auto negotiation
TAG flag of PORT Tag aware Tag aware
PORT type PE PE
Timeslot VCTRUNK1: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
VCTRUNK2: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12, VC4-14,
VC4-16
Bound bandwidth 8 x VC-4
VLAN ID 1 2 1 /
VB VB1 VB2
PORT tunnel 100 200
RPR1 tunnel 100 200

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-28
The forwarding filter table of each NE is shown in Table 4-9.
Table 4-9 Forwarding filter table
NE name VB VLAN ID Forwarding port
VB1 1 PORT1, RPR1
VB1 2 PORT1, RPR1
VB2 1 PORT1, RPR1
NE11
VB2 2 PORT1, RPR1
VB1 1 PORT2, RPR1
VB1 2 PORT2, RPR1
NE22
VB2 1 PORT3, RPR1
VB1 1 PORT2, RPR1
VB2 1 PORT3, RPR1
NE33
VB2 2 PORT3, RPR1
VB1 1 PORT2, RPR1
VB1 2 PORT2, RPR1
NE44
VB2 1 PORT3, RPR1

4. Timeslot Allocation Diagram
Figure 4-8 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.
Timeslot
NE22
Station
NE33
NE44 NE11
12-SL16-1
NE11
7-SL16-112-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
Ring
Add/Drop
VC-4-1
.
.
.
VC-4-8
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2

Figure 4-8 Timeslot allocation diagram

4.2.3 Configuration Process
Table 4-10 shows the process of configuring the EVPLn service on RPR on the
T2000.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-29
Table 4-10 Process of configuring EVPLn service on RPR
Stage Description Remarks
1 Creating a board
2 Configuring Ethernet interfaces
3 Configuring binding paths
4 Creating the EVPLn service
5 Configuring the forwarding filter table
6 Configuring RPR parameters
7 Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards
to SDH line boards


1. Creating a Board
Follow the steps below to create a board.
Step Action
1 In the Main Topology, double click the NE11 icon to open the NE panel.
2 Right click corresponding slot according to the board layout of NE11 shown
in Figure 4-6, and select the board.
3 Make sure the board has been configured. Then, click <Close>.
4 Repeat steps 13 to create the board for NE22, NE33 and NE44
respectively. Figure 4-2 shows the board layout.

2. Configuring NE11 Data

Note:
Refer to the NM online help for the meaning of each parameter during service
configuration.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-30
(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1 Right click the NE11 icon in the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select 13-EMR0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree. Then, click .
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT1 to
Enabled. Set the Working mode of the PORT1 to 1000M full duplex.
Click <Apply>.
Select the MPLS tab. Set the Port Type of the PORT1 to P. Click
<Apply>.
Select the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Set the Encapsulation Mode of
PORT1 to VMANoE.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

The EMR0 board has 13 PORTs. Table 4-3 shows the relation between PORTs and
physical interfaces of the EMR0.
(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click<Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11,
VC4-13, VC4-15
Click .
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-31
Step Action
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12,
VC4-14, VC4-16
Click .
Click <OK>.

Note:
VCTRUNK1 for the RPR service must be bound with VC-4s all in odd number, and
VCTRUNK2 for the PRP service must be bound with VC-4s all in even number.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-32
(3) Creating the EVPLn service
Follow the steps below to create the EVPLn service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the
function tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create the Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box is
displayed.
3 Configure VB name to VB1.
4 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration
dialog box is displayed.
5
Select PORT1 and RPR1 for Available Mounted Ports, and click .
Click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-33
Step Action
6 Perform the following settings in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box.
Uplink Tunnel: 100
Click <Apply>.

7 Configure VB name as VB2.
8 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration
dialog box is displayed.
9
Select PORT1 and RPR1 for Available Mounted Ports, and click .
Click <OK>.
10 Perform the following settings in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box.
Uplink Tunnel: 200
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring the VLAN forwarding filter table
Follow the steps below to configure the forwarding filter table.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the
function tree. Select VLAN tab.
2 Click <New> and the Create VALN dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-34
Step Action
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 1-VB1
VLAN ID: 1
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT1 and PRR1
Click <Apply>.

4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 1-VB1
VLAN ID: 2
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT1 and RPR1
Click <Apply>.
5 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 2-VB2
VLAN ID: 1
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT1 and RPR1
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-35
Step Action
6 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 2-VB2
VLAN ID: 2
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT1 and RPR1
Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring RPR parameters
Follow the steps below to configure RPR parameters.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/RPR Management/Topology Information] from the
function tree.
2 Perform the following settings in the Local Node Information tab.
Node No.: 1
Node name: NE11
RPR Enable: Enabled
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

3 Select the Link Information tab and set bandwidth for various levels of
services.
Used Bandwidth of Priority A: 0
Reserved Bandwidth of Priority A: 0
Used Bandwidth of Priority B-CIR: 0
Click <Apply>.


(6) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE11 from the object tree.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-36
Step Action
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-37
Step Action
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

3. Configuring NE22 Data

Hint:
The data configuration of NE22 is performed in the same way as that of NE11, except
that some parameters are different.

(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE22, and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-EMR0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree, and then click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT2 and
PORT3 to Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the MPLS tab. Set the Port Type of the PORT2 and PORT3 to PE.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-38
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12,
VC4-14, VC4-16
Click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the EVPLn service
Follow the steps below to create the EVPLn service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the
function tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create the Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box is
displayed.
3 Configure VB name to VB1.
4 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
5
Select PORT2 and RPR1 for Available Mounted Ports and click .
Click <OK>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-39
Step Action
6 Perform the following settings in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box.
Uplink Tunnel: 100
Click <Apply>.
7 Configure VB name as VB2.
8 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
9
Select PORT3 and RPR1 for Available Mounted Ports, and click .
Click <OK>.
10 Perform the following settings in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box.
Uplink Tunnel: 200
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring the VLAN forwarding filter table
Follow the steps below to configure the forwarding filter table.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the
function tree. Select VLAN tab.
2 Click <New> and the Create VALN dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 1-VB1
VLAN ID: 1
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT2 and RPR1
Click <Apply>.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 1-VB1
VLAN ID: 2
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT2 and RPR1
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-40
Step Action
5 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 2-VB2
VLAN ID: 1
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT3 and RPR1
Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring RPR parameters
Follow the steps below to configure RPR parameters.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/RPR Management/Topology Information] from the
function tree.
2 Perform the following settings in the Local Node Information] tab.
Node No.: 2
Node name: NE22
RPR Enable: Enabled
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(6) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE22 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-41
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

4. Configuring NE33 Data
(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE33, and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-EMR0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree. Then, click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT2 and
PORT3 to Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the MPLS tab. Set the Port Type of the PORT2 and PORT3 to PE.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-42
(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12,
VC4-14, VC4-16
Click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the EVPLn service
Follow the steps below to create the EVPLn service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the
function tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create the Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box is
displayed.
3 Configure VB name to VB1.
4 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-43
Step Action
5
Select PORT2 and RPR1 for Available Mounted Ports and click .
Click <OK>.
6 Perform the following settings in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box.
Uplink Tunnel: 100
Click <Apply>.
7 Configure VB name as VB2.
8 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
9
Select PORT3 and RPR1 for Available Mounted Ports, and click .
Click <OK>.
10 Perform the following settings in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box.
Uplink Tunnel: 200
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring the forwarding filter table
Follow the steps below to configure the forwarding filter table.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the
function tree. Select VLAN tab.
2 Click <New> and the Create VALN dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 1-VB1
VLAN ID: 1
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT2 and RPR1
Click <Apply>.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 2-VB2
VLAN ID: 1
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT3 and RPR1
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-44
Step Action
5 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 2-VB2
VLAN ID: 2
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT3 and RPR1
Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring RPR parameters
Follow the steps below to configure RPR parameters.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/RPR Management/Topology Information] from the
function tree.
2 Perform the following settings in the Local Node Information tab.
Node No.: 3
Node Name: NE33
RPR Enable: Enabled
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(6) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE33 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-45
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
5 Continue to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

5. Configuring NE44 Data
(1) Configuring Ethernet interfaces
Follow the steps below to configure Ethernet interfaces.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE44, and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-EMR0 from the object tree and [Configuration/Ethernet Interface
Management/Ethernet Interface] from the function tree. Then, click
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings.
Select the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Enabling a port of the PORT2 and
PORT3 to Enabled. Click <Apply>.
Select the MPLS tab. Set the Port Type of the PORT2 and PORT3 to PE.
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-46
(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select the Binding Path tab from the internal port page.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-1, VC4-3, VC4-5, VC4-7, VC4-9, VC4-11, VC4-13,
VC4-15
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4-xv
Direction: Bidirectional
Available Resources: VC4-2, VC4-4, VC4-6, VC4-8, VC4-10, VC4-12,
VC4-14, VC4-16
Click .
Click <OK>.

(3) Creating the EVPLn service
Follow the steps below to create the EVPLn service.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the
function tree.
2 Click <New> and the Create the Ethernet LAN Service" dialog box is
displayed.
3 Configure VB name to VB1.
4 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-47
Step Action
5
Select PORT2 and RPR1 for Available Mounted Ports and click .
Click <OK>.
6 Perform the following settings in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box.
Uplink Tunnel: 100
Click <Apply>.
7 Configure VB name as VB2.
8 Click <Configure Mounted Port> and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
9
Select PORT3 and RPR1 for Available Mounted Ports, and click .
Click <OK>.
10 Perform the following settings in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box.
Uplink Tunnel: 200
Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring the forwarding filter table
Follow the steps below to configure the forwarding filter table.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/Ethernet Service/Ethernet LAN Service] from the
function tree. Select VLAN tab.
2 Click <New> and the Create VALN dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 1-VB1
VLAN ID: 1
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT2 and RPR1
Click <Apply>.
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 1-VB1
CAR ID: 2
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT2 and RPR1
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-48
Step Action
5 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
VB: 2-VB2
VLAN ID: 1
Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT3 and RPR1
Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring RPR parameters
Follow the steps below to configure RPR parameters.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/RPR Management/Topology Information] from the
function tree.
2 Perform the following settings in the Local Node Information tab.
Node No.: 4
Node Name: NE44
RPR Enable: Enabled
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(6) Configuring the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from Ethernet boards to SDH
line boards.
Step Action
1 Select NE44 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
3 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services on RPR

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
4-49
Step Action
4 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC-4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-EMR0-1
Source Timeslot: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 18
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-1
5 Configuring ATM Services
This chapter describes the process of configuring asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
services on the T2000. In addition, related engineering requirements and information
are introduced. Through this example, you can learn how to configure ATM services
and other similar services.
The contents include:
Engineering Requirements
Engineering Planning
Configuration Process

Note:
In this chapter, the OptiX OSN 3500 product is taken as an example. For the OptiX
OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, service configuration is performed in the same way.
The only difference is that the boards are inserted in different slots.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-2
5.1 Engineering Requirements
A new communication line is to be constructed among NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 for
transmitting the services from ATM equipment on each node to the ATM switch on the
central node NE1. The ATM switch of NE1 provides one 155 Mbit/s optical interface to
access ATM services of each node.
The SDH layer provides ring network protection, and the ATM layer provides VP-Ring
protection. In the case of fiber-cut or optical board failure, services can be protected
first on the SDH layer with the switching time less than 50ms.
Table 5-1 shows the ATM service requirements of each node.
Table 5-1 ATM service requirements of each node
No. Service
requirement
Source station Sink station Bandwidth
1 Point-to-point NE2 NE1 3 x 10 Mbit/s
2 Point-to-point NE3 NE1 2 x 20 Mbit/s
3 Point-to-point NE4 NE1 1 x 30 Mbit/s
1 x 20 Mbit/s

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-3
5.2 Engineering Planning
Engineering planning is conducted based on the above requirements and the
following engineering information is output.
Networking Diagram
Board Information of Each NE
Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Timeslot Allocation Diagram
1. Networking Diagram
Figure 5-1 shows the ATM service networking and port allocation.
STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
OptiX OSN 3500
ATM switch
DSLAM
10M
10M
10M
20M
20M
30M
20M
155 Mbit/s
optical
interface
155 Mbit/s
optical interface
155 Mbit/s
optical interface
155 Mbit/s
optical
interface
155 Mbit/s
optical interface
155 Mbit/s
optical interface

Figure 5-1 ATM service networking and port allocation

2. Board Information of Each NE
The ADQ1 board needs to be configured according to service type and traffic volume.
Figure 5-2 shows the board layout of NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-4
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
S
L
1
6
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
A
D
Q
1
S
L
1
6

Figure 5-2 Board layout of NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4

Note:
ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4, and IDQ1 support 1+1 protection. The working and protection
boards of IDL4 or IDQ1 require to be inserted in paired slots. Otherwise, The ADL4
and ADQ1 do not require.

3. Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
Figure 5-3 shows the service configuration diagram of each NE.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-5
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
OptiX OSN 3500
10M 1 33
10M 1 34
10M 1 35
20M 2 33 20M 2 34
120M
1 34
30M 3 34
1 35
2 33
2 34
3 33
3 34
20M 3 33
1 33
Bandwidth VPI VCI
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 1 Port 2
Port 2
Port 1
Port 1

Figure 5-3 Service configuration diagram

Table 5-2 shows the ATM service connection table.
Table 5-2 ATM service connection table
NE2 NE3 NE4 Service

Attribute
10
Mbit/s
10
Mbit/s
10
Mbit/s
20
Mbit/s
20
Mbit/s
20
Mbit/s
30
Mbit/s
Source NE NE1
Source board - port 13-ADQ1-1
Max. VPI Bits 8
Max. VCI Bits 7
Number of VPI
supporting VCC
32
VCTRUNK port VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
Port traffic 120 Mbit/s
Bound bandwidth 1 x VC-4
Service type CBR
Protection type 1+1, sink protection, dual end
VPI 1 1 1 2 2 3 3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-6
VCI 33 34 35 33 34 33 34
Port traffic 10 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s 20 Mbit/s 20 Mbit/s 20 Mbit/s 30 Mbit/s
Sink NE NE2 NE3 NE4
Sink board - port 13-ADQ1
-1
13-ADQ1
-2
13-ADQ1
-3
13-ADQ1
-1
13-ADQ1
-2
13-ADQ1
-1
13-ADQ1
-2
Max. VPI Bits 8
Max. VCI Bits 7
Number of VPI
supporting VCC
32
VCTRUNK port VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Table 5-3 The configuration rule of VCTRUNCK binding path and time slot
Board VCTRUNCK Binding path level Available path and time slot
VCTRUNCK1VCTRUNCK4 VC-4 Available VC-4:14
VCTRUNCK5VCTRUNCK16 VC-4 Available VC-4:58
ADQ1/ADL4
VCTRUNCK5VCTRUNCK16 VC-3 Available VC-4:58
Available VC-3 time slot:13
VCTRUNCK1VCTRUNCK66 VC-4 Available VC-4:14
VCTRUNCK1VCTRUNCK66 VC-12 Available VC-4:1
Available VC-12 time
slot:163
IDQ1/IDL4
VCTRUNCK67VCTRUNCK70 VC-4 Available VC-4:58

4. Timeslot Allocation Diagram
Figure 5-4 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3
NE4 NE1
12-SL16-1
NE1
7-SL16-112-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1 12-SL16-1 7-SL16-1
Ring
Add/Drop
VC-4-1
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2

Figure 5-4 Timeslot allocation diagram

5.3 Configuration Process
Table 5-4 shows the process of configuring ATM services on the T2000.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-7
Table 5-4 Process of configuring ATM services
Stage Description Remarks
1 Creating a board
2 Configuring port attributes of the ATM board
3 Configuring binding paths
4 Configuring ATM traffic
5 Configuring cross-connect for ATM services
6 Configuring a protection group for ATM services
7 Configuring a protection pair for ATM services
8 Configuring the cross-connect from ATM boards to
SDH line boards


1. Creating a Board
Follow the steps below to create a board.
Step Action
1 In the Main Topology, double click the NE1 icon to open the NE panel.
2 Right click the corresponding slot according to the board layout of NE1 shown
in Figure 5-2, and select the board.
3 Make sure the board has been configured and click <Close>.
4 Repeat steps 13 to create the board of NE2, NE3, and NE4 respectively.
Figure 5-2 shows the board layout.

2. Configuring NE1 Data

Note:
Refer to the NM online help for the meaning of each parameter during service
configuration.

(1) Configuring port attributes of the ATM board
Follow the steps below to configure port attributes of the ATM board.
Step Action
1 Right click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select 13-ADQ1 from the object tree and [Configuration/ATM Interface
Management/ATM Interface Management] from the function tree. Then, click
.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-8
Step Action
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings for port 1:
Max. VPI Bits: 8
Max. VCI Bits: 7
Number of VPI supporting VCC: 32
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

4 Select Internal Port, and perform the following settings for ports 1 and 2.
Max. VPI Bits: 8
Max. VCI Bits: 7
Number of VPI supporting VCC: 32
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.


Note:
The value of Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits indicates bits of a binary numeral. If the
value is 4, the maximum value of VPI or VCI is 2
4
=16.
There are two types of ATM ports: UNI and NNI. Their two different cell structures
determine the maximum value of VPI bits supported by the ports.
The UNI type: max. VPI Bits is 18, and max. VCI Bits is 116.
The NNI type: max. VPI Bits is 112, and max. VCI Bits is 116.

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/ATM interface Management/ATM Binding Path
Management] from the function tree.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-9
Step Action
Available VC-4: VC4-1
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available VC4: VC4-2
Click .
Click <OK>.


(3) Configuring ATM traffic
Follow the steps below to configure ATM traffic.
Step Action
1 Select NE1 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/ATM Traffic Descriptor] from the function tree.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-10
Step Action
3 Right click in the ATM Traffic Descriptor and select <Create>.

4 According to Figure 5-3, perform the following settings in the dialog box to
create 10 Mbit/s traffic control.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 23584
Clp0Pcr: 18867
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

5 Repeat step 4 to create 20 Mbit/s traffic control. Perform the following settings
in the dialog box.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 47168
Clp0Pcr: 37734
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-11
Step Action
6 Repeat step 4 to create 30 Mbit/s traffic control. Perform the following settings
in the dialog box.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 70752
Clp0Pcr: 56601
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <OK>.

Note:
The value of Clp0Pcr is less than that of Clp01Pcr, in the proportion of 0.8.

(4) Configuring cross-connect for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure cross-connect for ATM services.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/ATM Service Management] from the function tree.
2 Right click the Cross-Connect column and select <Add Connection>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-12
Step Action
3 According to Table 5-2, perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the first channel of service from
NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 1
Connection Type: PVC
Spread Type: p2p
Source board: NE1-13-ADQ1
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Positive UPC/NPC: Enable
Sink board: NE1-13-ADQ1
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Reverse UPC/NPC: Enable
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-13
Step Action
4 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the first
channel of service from NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 2
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the second channel of service from
NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 3
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
6 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the second
channel of service from NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 4
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-14
Step Action
7 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the third channel of service from
NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 5
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 35
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 35
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
8 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the third
channel of service from NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 6
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 35
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 35
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
9 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the first channel of service from
NE1 to NE3.
Connection ID: 7
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 2
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 2
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-15
Step Action
10 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the first
channel of service from NE1 to NE3.
Connection ID: 8
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 2
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 2
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
11 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the second channel of service from
NE1 to NE3.
Connection ID: 9
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 2
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 2
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
12 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the second
channel of service from NE1 to NE3.
Connection ID: 10
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 2
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 2
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-16
Step Action
13 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the first channel of service from
NE1 to NE4.
Connection ID: 11
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 3
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
14 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the first
channel of service from NE1 to NE4.
Connection ID: 12
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 3
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
15 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the second channel of service from
NE1 to NE4.
Connection ID: 13
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 3
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 3
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 3
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-17
Step Action
16 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the second
channel of service from NE1 to NE4.
Connection ID: 14
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 3
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 3
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 3
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring a protection group for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure a protection group for ATM services.
Step Action
1 Right click the Protection Group column and select <Add Protection Group>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-18
Step Action
2 Perform the following settings in the Add Protection Group dialog box.
Protection type: 1+1
Switching Direction: Sink
Switching Type: Dual end
Revertive Mode: Revertive
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <OK>.


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-19
(6) Configuring a protection pair for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure a protection pair for ATM services.
Step Action
1 Right click the Cross-Connect column and select <Add into Protection
Group>.

2 Perform the following settings in the Add Connection into Protection Group
to create a protection group for the first channel of service from NE1 to NE2.
Working Connection ID: 1
Protection Connection ID: 2
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-20
Step Action
3 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the second channel of
service from NE1 to NE2.
Working Connection ID: 3
Protection Connection ID: 4
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <Apply>.
4 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the third channel of service
from NE1 to NE2.
Working Connection ID: 5
Protection Connection ID: 6
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the first channel of service
from NE1 to NE3.
Working Connection ID: 7
Protection Connection ID: 8
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <Apply>.
6 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the second channel of
service from NE1 to NE3.
Working Connection ID: 9
Protection Connection ID: 10
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <Apply>.
7 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the first channel of service
from NE1 to NE4.
Working Connection ID: 11
Protection Connection ID: 12
Protection Group ID: 1. Click <Apply>.
8 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the second channel of
service from NE1 to NE4.
Working Connection ID: 13
Protection Connection ID: 14
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <OK>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-21
(7) Configuring the cross-connect from ATM boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from ATM boards to SDH line
boards.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
2 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-ADQ1-5
Source Timeslot: 1
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-22
Step Action
4 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-ADQ1-5
Source Timeslot: 2
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

Note:
The 5 in 13-ADQ1-5 is the port number of the ADQ1 on the SDH side.

3. Configuring NE2 Data

Note:
The data configuration of NE2 is performed in the similar way as that of NE1, except
that some parameters are different.

(1) Configuring port attributes of the ATM board
Follow the steps below to configure port attributes of the ATM board.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE2, and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-ADQ1 from the object tree and [Configuration/ATM Interface
Management/ATM Interface Management] from the function tree. Then, click
.
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings for ports 1, 2 and 3.
Max. VPI Bits: 8
Max. VCI Bits: 7
Number of VPI supporting VCC: 32
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-23
Step Action
4 Select Internal Port, and perform the following settings for ports 1 and 2.
Max. VPI Bits: 8
Max. VCI Bits: 7
Number of VPI supporting VCC: 32
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/ATM interface Management/ATM Binding Path
Management] from the function tree.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available VC4: VC4-1
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available VC4: VC4-2
Click and then <OK>.

(3) Configuring ATM traffic
Follow the steps below to configure ATM traffic.
Step Action
1 Select NE2 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/ATM Traffic Descriptor] from the function tree.
3 Right click in the ATM Traffic Descriptor and select <Create>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-24
Step Action
4 According to Figure 5-3, perform the following settings to create 10 Mbit/s
traffic control.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 23584
Clp0Pcr: 18867
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 3 to create 40 Mbit/s traffic control. Perform the following
settings in the dialog box.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 94336
Clp0Pcr: 75468
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
6 Repeat step 3 to create 50 Mbit/s traffic control. Perform the following
settings in the dialog box.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 117920
Clp0Pcr: 94336
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring cross-connect for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure cross-connect for ATM services.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/ATM Service Management] from the function tree.
2 Right click the Cross-Connect column and select <Add Connection>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-25
Step Action
3 According to Table 5-2, perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the first channel of service from
NE2 to NE1.
Connection ID: 1
Connection Type: PVC
Spread Type: p2p
Source board: NE2-13-ADQ1
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Positive UPC/NPC: Enable
Sink board: NE2-13-ADQ1
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Reverse UPC/NPC: Enable
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
4 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the protection service for the first
channel of service from NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 2
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-26
Step Action
5 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the second channel of service
from NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 3
Source Port: External Port - 1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
6 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the second
channel of service from NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 4
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
7 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the third channel of service from
NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 5
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 35
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 35
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-27
Step Action
8 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the third
channel of service from NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 6
Source Port: External Port - 1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 35
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 1
Sink VCI: 35
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
9 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the pass-through service from
NE1 to NE3.
Connection ID: 7
Connection Type: PVP
Source Port: Internal Port - 1
Source VPI: 2
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 2
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
10 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the pass-through service from
NE1 to NE4.
Connection ID: 8
Connection Type: PVP
Source Port: Internal Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 3
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 3
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 3
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring a protection group for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure a protection group for ATM services.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-28
Step Action
1 Right click the Protection Group column and select <Add Protection
Group>.
2 Perform the following settings in the Add Protection Group dialog box.
Protection type: 1+1
Switching Direction: Sink
Switching Type: Dual end
Revertive Mode: Revertive
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <OK>.

(6) Configuring a protection pair for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure a protection pair for ATM services.
Step Action
1 Right click the Cross-Connect column and select <Add into Protection
Group>.
2 Perform the following settings in the Add Connection into Protection Group
to create a protection group for the first channel of service from NE1 to NE2.
Working Connection ID: 1
Protection Connection ID: 2
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <Apply>.
3 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the second channel of
service from NE1 to NE2.
Working Connection ID: 3
Protection Connection ID: 4
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <Apply>.
4 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the third channel of service
from NE1 to NE2.
Working Connection ID: 5
Protection Connection ID: 6
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <OK>.

(7) Configuring the cross-connect from ATM boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from ATM boards to SDH line
boards.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-29
Step Action
2 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-ADQ1-5
Source Timeslot: 1
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
4 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-ADQ1-5
Source Timeslot: 2
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.
4. Configuring NE3 Data
(1) Configuring port attributes of the ATM board
Follow the steps below to configure port attributes of the ATM board.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE3 and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-ADQ1 from the object tree and [Configuration/ATM Interface
Management/ATM Interface Management] from the function tree. Then click
.
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings for ports 1 and 2.
Max. VPI Bits: 8
Max. VCI Bits: 7
Number of VPI supporting VCC: 32
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
4 Select Internal Port, and perform the following settings for ports 1 and 2.
Max. VPI Bits: 8
Max. VCI Bits: 7
Number of VPI supporting VCC: 32
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-30
(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/ATM interface Management/ATM Binding Path
Management] from the function tree.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available VC4: VC4-1
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available VC4: VC4-2
Click and then <OK>.

(3) Configuring ATM traffic
Follow the steps below to configure ATM traffic.
Step Action
1 Select NE3 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/ATM Traffic Descriptor] from the function tree.
3 Right click in the ATM Traffic Descriptor and select <Create>.
4 According to Figure 5-3, perform the following settings to create 20 Mbit/s
traffic control.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 47168
Clp0Pcr: 37734
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-31
Step Action
5 Repeat step 3 to create 30 Mbit/s traffic control. Perform the following
settings in the dialog box.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 70752
Clp0Pcr: 56601
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
6 Repeat step 3 to create 50 Mbit/s traffic control. Perform the following
settings in the dialog box.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 117920
Clp0Pcr: 94336
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring cross-connect for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure cross-connect for ATM services.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/ATM Service Management] from the function tree.
2 Right click the Cross-Connect column and select <Add Connection>.
3 According to Table 5-2, perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the first channel of service from
NE3 to NE1.
Connection ID: 1
Connection Type: PVC
Spread Type: p2p
Source board: NE3-13-ADQ1
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 2
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Positive UPC/NPC: Enable
Sink board: NE3-13-ADQ1
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 2
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Reverse UPC/NPC: Enable
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-32
Step Action
4 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the first
channel of service from NE1 to NE3.
Connection ID: 2
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 2
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 2
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the second channel of service
from NE1 to NE3.
Connection ID: 3
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 2
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 2
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
6 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the second
channel of service from NE1 to NE3.
Connection ID: 4
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 2
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 2
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-33
Step Action
7 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the protection service passing
through NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 5
Connection Type: PVP
Source Port: Internal Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 1
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
8 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the pass-through service from
NE1 to NE4.
Connection ID: 6
Connection Type: PVP
Source Port: Internal Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 3
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 3
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 3
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring a protection group for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure a protection group for ATM services.
Step Action
1 Right click the Protection Group column and select <Add Protection
Group>.
2 Perform the following settings in the Add Protection Group dialog box.
Protection type: 1+1
Switching Direction: Sink
Switching Type: Dual end
Revertive Mode: Revertive
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <OK>.

(6) Configuring a protection pair for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure a protection pair for ATM services.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-34
Step Action
1 Right click the Cross-Connect column and select <Add into Protection
Group>.
2 Perform the following settings in the Add Connection into Protection Group
to create a protection group for the first channel of service from NE1 to NE3.
Working Connection ID: 1
Protection Connection ID: 2
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <Apply>.
3 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the second channel of
service from NE1 to NE3.
Working Connection ID: 3
Protection Connection ID: 4
Protection Group ID: 1.
Click <OK>.

(7) Configuring the cross-connect from ATM boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from ATM boards to SDH line
boards.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
2 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-ADQ1-5
Source Timeslot: 1
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-35
Step Action
4 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-ADQ1-5
Source Timeslot: 2
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.

5. Configuring NE4 Data
(1) Configuring port attributes of the ATM board
Follow the steps below to configure port attributes of the ATM board.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon . Select NE4 and click <OK>.
2 Select 13-ADQ1 from the object tree and [Configuration/ATM Interface
Management/ATM Interface Management] from the function tree. Then, click
.
3 Select External Port, and perform the following settings for ports 1 and 2.
Max. VPI Bits: 8
Max. VCI Bits: 7
Number of VPI supporting VCC: 32
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
4 Select Internal Port, and perform the following settings for ports 1 and 2.
Max. VPI Bits: 8
Max. VCI Bits: 7
Number of VPI supporting VCC: 32
Other items adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.

(2) Configuring binding paths
Follow the steps below to configure binding paths.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/ATM interface Management/ATM Binding Path
Management] from the function tree.
2 Click <Configuration> and the binding path configuration dialog box is
displayed.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-36
Step Action
3 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK1, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available VC4: VC4-1
Click .
4 To configure binding paths for VCTRUNK2, perform the following settings in
the dialog box.
Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Available VC4: VC4-2
Click and then <OK>.

(3) Configuring ATM traffic
Follow the steps below to configure ATM traffic.
Step Action
1 Select NE4 from the object tree.
2 Select [Configuration/ATM Traffic Descriptor] from the function tree.
3 Right click in the ATM Traffic Descriptor and select <Select>.
4 According to Figure 5-3, perform the following settings to create 20 Mbit/s
traffic control.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 47168
Clp0Pcr: 37734
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 3 to create 30 Mbit/s traffic control. Perform the following
settings in the dialog box.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 70752
Clp0Pcr: 56601
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-37
Step Action
6 Repeat step 3 to create 40 Mbit/s traffic control. Perform the following
settings in the dialog box.
Traffic Type: 4.ClpTaggingNoScr
Service Type: CBR
Clp01Pcr: 94336
Clp0Pcr: 75468
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <OK>.

(4) Configuring cross-connect for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure cross-connect for ATM services.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/ATM Service Management] from the function tree.
2 Right click the Cross-Connect column and select <Add Connection>.
3 According to Table 5-2, perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the first channel of service from
NE4 to NE1.
Connection ID: 1
Connection Type: PVC
Spread Type: p2p
Source board: NE4-13-ADQ1
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Positive UPC/NPC: Enable
Sink board: NE4-13-ADQ1
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 3
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Reverse UPC/NPC: Enable
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-38
Step Action
4 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the first
channel of service from NE1 to NE4.
Connection ID: 2
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Source VCI: 33
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 1
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 3
Sink VCI: 33
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 1
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
5 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the second channel of service
from NE1 to NE4.
Connection ID: 3
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -1
Sink VPI: 3
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
6 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure protection service for the second
channel of service from NE1 to NE4.
Connection ID: 4
Source Port: External Port -1
Source VPI: 3
Source VCI: 34
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 3
Sink VCI: 34
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-39
Step Action
7 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the protection service passing
through NE1 to NE2.
Connection ID: 5
Connection Type: PVP
Source Port: Internal Port -1
Source VPI: 1
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 2
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 1
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 2
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <Apply>.
8 Repeat step 3 to perform the following settings in the Add ATM
Cross-Connection dialog box to configure the protection service passing
through NE1 to NE3.
Connection ID: 6
Connection Type: PVP
Source Port: Internal Port -1
Source VPI: 2
Positive Traffic Descriptor: 3
Sink Port: Internal Port -2
Sink VPI: 2
Reverse Traffic Descriptor: 3
Other parameters are the same as those in step 3. Click <OK>.

(5) Configuring a protection group for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure a protection group for ATM services.
Step Action
1 Right click the Protection Group column and select <Add Protection
Group>.
2 Perform the following settings in the Add Protection Group dialog box.
Protection type: 1+1
Switching Direction: Sink
Switching Type: Dual end
Revertive Mode: Revertive
Other parameters adopt the default value. Click <OK>.

(6) Configuring a protection pair for ATM services
Follow the steps below to configure a protection pair for ATM services.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-40
Step Action
1 Right click the Cross-Connect column and select <Add into Protection
Group>.
2 Perform the following settings in the Add Connection into Protection Group
to create a protection group for the first channel of service from NE1 to NE3.
Working Connection ID: 1
Protection Connection ID: 2
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <Apply>.
3 Repeat step 2 to perform the following settings in the Add Connection into
Protection Group to create a protection group for the second channel of
service from NE1 to NE3.
Working Connection ID: 3
Protection Connection ID: 4
Protection Group ID: 1
Click <OK>.

(7) Configuring the cross-connect from ATM boards to SDH line boards
Follow the steps below to configure the cross-connect from ATM boards to SDH line
boards.
Step Action
1 Select [Configuration/SDH Service Configuration] from the function tree.
2 Click <Create> and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-ADQ1-5
Source Timeslot: 1
Sink Slot: 7-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring ATM Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
5-41
Step Action
4 Repeat step 4 to perform the following settings in the dialog box.
Level: VC4
Direction: Bidirectional
Source Slot: 13-ADQ1-5
Source Timeslot: 2
Sink Slot: 12-N2SL16-1
Sink Timeslot: 1
Activate Immediately: Yes
Click <OK>.


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
6-1
6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services
This chapter describes how to configure broadcast data services on the T2000
through a configuration sample.
The contents include:
Overview
Engineering Requirements
Engineering Planning
Configuration Process

Note:
In this chapter, the OptiX OSN 3500 is taken as an example. For the OptiX OSN 2500
and the OptiX OSN 1500, service configuration is performed in the same way. The
only difference is that the boards are inserted in different slots.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
6-2
6.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the RS232 or RS422 broadcast data port to implement
universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The
data is transmitted transparently, and there is no need to configure port rate or
transmission control protocols. The maximum bit rate can be 19.2 kbit/s. The OptiX
OSN 3500 connects with data terminal equipment through this port. The
communication mode can be configured as point to point or point to multipoint and
data can be broadcasted to multiple optical ports.
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses overhead bytes (Serial1Serial4) in Table 6-1 as the
broadcast data communication channel. The RJ-45 connector is used, whose pins are
defined in Table 6-1.

Note:
After sent to the broadcast data port, the asynchronous data is analog-digital
converted and then transmitted to the far end through any one byte between Serial1
and Serial4. At the far end, the data is digital-analog converted into asynchronous
serial signals.

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3 Serial 1 Serial2
AU_PTR
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 Serial 4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12 Serial3
S1 M1 E2

Figure 6-1 Overhead channel

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
6-3
Table 6-1 Definitions of the broadcast data port pins
Front view Pin No. Signal Description
1 422TXD+ Positive data transmitting
end of RS422
2 422TXD- Negative data transmitting
end of RS422
3 422RXD+ Positive data receiving end
of RS422
4 232RXD Data receiving end of RS232
5 GND Grounding
6 422RXD- Negative data receiving end
of RS422
7 N.C No connection
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 232TXD Data transmit ting end of
RS232

6.1.1 Requirements for the Environment Monitor
The interface uses RS-232 level, logic 1 being 5 V to 15 V and logic 0 being +5 V to
+15 V.
When there is no data transmitted, the port is at RS-232 high level (about 9 V), and at
any one time only one slave station can transmit data to the master station.
6.1.2 Precautions During Configuration of the Broadcast Data Port
Avoid configuring redundant optical interfaces, 12-N1SL16 of NE3 for example, to the
broadcast domain of the broadcast data port.
Avoid configuring the broadcast data port of the NEs without requirement for
broadcast data service to the broadcast domain, because the input level cannot be
maintained to logic 1 in this case, thus resulting in hidden troubles.
Keep the data flow direction consistent with the trace direction of the NE clock.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
6-4
6.2 Engineering Requirements
As shown in Figure 6-2, NE2, NE3 and NE4 are configured with an environment
monitor, and NE1 is configured with a monitor host. The monitor host communicates
with the environment monitors of NE2NE4 through the broadcast data port to control
data report from NE2NE4. The monitor host broadcasts commands to the
environment monitors of NE2NE4, which, serving as slave stations, report the data
collected locally to the monitor host.
6.3 Engineering Planning
Engineering planning is conducted based on the above requirements and the
following engineering information is output.
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
Station
Central station
OptiX OSN
equipment
Data stream
Environment
monitor
Host
12-N1SL16
12-N1SL16
7-N1SL16
7-N1SL16
12-N1SL16
7-N1SL16
Station
Station

Figure 6-2 Application of broadcast data port

Determine the overhead bytes, broadcast data source and broadcast data sink of
each NE according to Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 NE parameters
NE Overhead
interface
Broadcast data source Broadcast data sink
NE 1 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 12-N1SL16, 7-N1SL16
NE2 SERIAL1 7-N1SL16 12-N1SL16, SERIAL1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
6-5
NE Overhead
interface
Broadcast data source Broadcast data sink
NE3 SERIAL1 7-N1SL16 SERIAL1
NE4 SERIAL1 12-N1SL16 SERIAL1

After the NE1 is set, the broadcast data source (the broadcast data port) broadcasts
data to 12-N1SL16 and 7-N1SL16 at the same time if there is data input. On the other
hand, 12-N1SL16 and 7-N1SL16 also send data to the broadcast data port if there is
data input. Therefore, only one environment monitor is allowed to send data at any
one moment.
6.4 Configuration Process
1. Configuring NE1
Follow the steps below to configure NE1.
Step Action
1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select NE1 and select [Configuration/Orderwire] from the Function Tree.
3 Select the Broadcast Data Port tab and set the following parameters.
Overhead Byte: SERIAL1. Select any one from SERIAL1SERIAL4. Here,
select SERIAL1 according to Figure 6-1.
Working Mode: RS232
Broadcast Data Source: SERIAL1
Broadcast Data Sink: 7-N1SL16 and 12-N1SL16

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
6-6
Step Action
4 Click <Apply>.

2. Configuring NE2
Follow the steps below to configure NE2.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switch shortcut icon , select NE2 and click <OK>.
2 Select NE2 and select [Configuration/Orderwire] from the Function Tree.
3 Select the Broadcast Data Port tab and set the following parameters.
Overhead Byte: SERIAL1, consistent with NE1.
Working Mode: RS232
Broadcast Data Source: 7-N1SL16
Broadcast Data Sink: 12-N1SL16 and SERIAL1
4 Click <Apply>.

3. Configuring NE3
Follow the steps below to configure NE3.
Step Action
1
Click the NE switch shortcut icon , select NE3 and click <OK>
2 Select NE3 and select [Configuration/Orderwire] from the Function Tree.
3 Select the Broadcast Data Port tab and set the following parameters.
Overhead Byte: SERIAL1, consistent with NE1.
Working Mode: RS232
Broadcast Data Source: 7-N1SL16
Broadcast Data Sink: SERIAL1
4 Click <Apply>.

4. Configuring NE4
Follow the steps below to configure NE4.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
6-7
Step Action
1
Click the NE switching shortcut icon , select NE4 and click <OK>.
2 Select NE4 and select [Configuration/Orderwire] from the Function Tree.
3 Select the Broadcast Data Port tab and set the following parameters.
Overhead Byte: SERIAL1, consistent with NE1.
Working Mode: RS232
Broadcast Data Source: 12-N1SL16
Broadcast Data Sink: SERIAL1
4 Click <Apply>.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring Build-in WDM System

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
7-1
7 Configuring Build-in WDM System
This chapter introduces how to configure the build-in WDM system on the T2000.
The contents include:
Overview
Engineering Planning
Configuration Process

Note:
In this chapter, the OptiX OSN 3500 is taken as an example. For the OptiX OSN 2500
and OptiX OSN 1500, the configuration is performed in the same way. The only
difference is that the boards are inserted in different slots.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring Build-in WDM System

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
7-2
7.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN products support build-in WDM system. The build-in WDM system,
comprising the LWX and MR2 boards, realizes the adding or dropping of two channels
at any rate, and four channels after concatenation. In addition, the dual-fed selective
receiving of the LWX provides protection to optical channels.
In Out
D01
A01
A02
D02
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
LWX
TX RX
IN1
OUT1
LWX
TX RX
IN1
OUT1
In Out
D01
A01
A02
D02
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
LWX
TX RX
IN1
OUT1
LWX
TX RX
IN1
OUT1
Station A Station B
Client side
Client
side
Client
side
Client side
WDM side
WDM side

Figure 7-1 Two channel adding/dropping system comprising two LWXs and an MR2 (without protection to
optical channels)

In Out
D01
A01
A02
D02
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
In Out
D01
A01
A02
D02
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
LWX
TX RX
IN1 IN2
OUT1 OUT2
LWX
TX RX
IN1 IN2
OUT1 OUT2
Client side
Station A
Client
side
WDM side WDM side
In Out
D01
A01
A02
D02
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
In Out
D01
A01
A02
D02
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
LWX
TX RX
IN1 IN2
OUT1 OUT2
LWX
TX RX
IN1 IN2
OUT1 OUT2
Client
side
Client
side
Station B
WDM
side
WDM
side

Figure 7-2 Two channel adding/dropping system comprising two LWXs and two MR2s (with protection to
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring Build-in WDM System

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
7-3
optical channels)

7.2 Engineering Planning
This section introduces the configuration method of build-in WDM systems through an
example. The details include:
Networking diagram
Board layout of each NE
1. Networking Diagram
Figure 7-3 shows the networking application of build-in WDM systems. There are two
channels being added to or dropped from NE1 and NE2 respectively. The 1+1
protection for optical channels is provided for the line between NE1 and NE2.
NE1
NE2

Figure 7-3 Networking application of build-in WDM systems

2. Board Layout of Each NE
According to the traffic type and protection requirements, configure two MR2s and two
LWXs. Figure 7-4 shows the board layout of NE1 and NE2.
The OptiX OSN products support two kinds of LWX boards: single-fed single receiving
LWX and dual-fed selective receiving LWX. In this example, the LWX supporting
dual-fed selective receiving function is configured. Configure the MR2A on the OptiX
OSN 3500. For the detailed configuration of the MR2 of other products, refer to OptiX
OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description
Manual.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring Build-in WDM System

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
7-4
FAN FAN FAN
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
2
7
S
1
9
S
2
0
S
2
1
S
2
2
S
2
3
S
2
4
S
2
5
S
2
6
S
3
7
S
2
9
S
3
0
S
3
1
S
3
2
S
3
3
S
3
4
S
3
6
S
3
5
S
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
G
X
C
S
G
X
C
S
L
W
X
L
W
X
M
R
2
A
M
R
2
A

Figure 7-4 Board layout of NE1 and NE2

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring Build-in WDM System

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
7-5
7.3 Configuration Process
Table 7-1 lists main procedures of configuring build-in WDM systems on the T2000.
Table 7-1 Main procedures of configuring build-in WDM systems
Procedure Description
1 Creating boards
2 Configuring the attributes of WDM interfaces
3 Creating protection pairs

1. Creating Boards
Follow the steps below to create boards.
Step Action
1 Double click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology to enter the NE panel.
2 According to Figure 7-4, right click the slots to be added with boards, and
select the corresponding boards.
3 Click <Close>.
4 Repeat steps 13 to create boards for NE2. The board layout of NE2 is
shown in Figure 7-4.

2. Configuring the Attributes of WDM Interfaces on the LWX

Note:
It is unnecessary to change the default parameter of LWX. For the meaning of each
parameter, refer to the onlin help of the T2000.

Step Action
1 Right click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select 1-LWX from the object tree and [Configuration/WDM Interface] from
the function tree.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring Build-in WDM System

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
7-6
Step Action
3 Check By Board/Port(Path), and then select Board from the drop-down
menu. Make sure the Board Receiving/Transmitting Attributes is
Dual-Fed-Selective-Receiving.

4 Select Path from the drop-down menu, and then the Basic Attributes tab.
Make sure the laser status of each port is Enabled. Normally, it is
unnecessary to change the default value.

5 Confirm the configuration of WDM interfaces on other LWX boards of NE1
and NE2 in the same way.

3. Creating Protection Pairs
Step Action
1 Right click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and select [NE Explorer].
2 Select [Configuration/Wavelength Protection Group] from the function tree.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring Build-in WDM System

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
7-7
Step Action
3 Click <New>, and perform the following settings in the Create Wavelength
Protection Group windows.
Master Path: NE1-1-LWX-1(IN1/OUT1)
Slave Path: NE1-1-LWX-2(IN2/OUT2)
Do not change other default values.
Click <Apply>.

4 Configure the wavelength protection group of the LWX in slot 2 of NE1 in the
same way.

5 Configure the two wavelength protection group of NE2 in the same way.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 8 FAQ

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
8-1
8 FAQ
This chapter describes the problems and solutions in configuring the OptiX OSN
3500/2500/1500 on the T2000.
The contents include:
Configuring REG
Configuring Boards with FEC
Configuring the Extended Subrack
Configuring Intelligent Features

Note:
In this chapter, the OptiX OSN 3500 is taken as an example. For the OptiX OSN 2500
and the OptiX OSN 1500, service configuration is performed in the same way. The
only difference is that the boards are inserted in different slots.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 8 FAQ

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
8-2
8.1 Configuring REG

Caution:
The T2000 with version V200R002C01 supports the OptiX OSN 2500 REG.

This section describes the configuration of the OptiX OSN REG and the precautions in
configuration.
1. Configuring a REG Board
When configuring REG, configure boards in slots 513, as shown in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Boards supported by the OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Board Slot
CRG Slots 9, 10
SL64, SF16, SL16, BA2, BPA, DCU Slots 58, 1113

Figure 8-1 shows the basic configuration of REG.
Fiber Routing
PIU
SLOT22
PIU
SLOT23
FAN
SLOT25
FAN
SLOT24
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
8
S
9
S
1
0
S
1
1
S
1
5
S
1
6
S
1
7
S
1
8
S
1
2
S
1
3
S
1
4
S
L
6
4
/
S
F
1
6
/
S
L
1
6
S
L
6
4
/
S
F
1
6
/
S
L
1
6
S
L
6
4
/
S
F
1
6
/
S
L
1
6
S
L
6
4
/
S
F
1
6
/
S
L
1
6
S
L
6
4
/
S
F
1
6
/
S
L
1
6
S
L
6
4
/
S
F
1
6
/
S
L
1
6
S
L
6
4
/
S
F
1
6
/
S
L
1
6
C
R
G
C
R
G
S
A
P

Figure 8-1 Basic configuration of REG

2. Configuring the REG NE
The REG NE is configured in the same way as the NEs of other types, except the NE
type is OptiX OSN 2500 REG.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 8 FAQ

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
8-3
Step Action
1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology, and select
[Create/Topology Object] from the shortcut menu. Select the NE type OSN
series/OptiX OSN 2500 REG.
2 Enter the NE attributes according to the following picture.
ID: 367
Extended ID: 9
NE Name: NE367
Gateway Type: Non-gateway
Port: 1400
NE User: root
Password: password
Leave Preconfiguration unselected.

3 Click <OK>.
4 Click the place in the Main Topology where you want the NE1 icon to appear.
The icon is marked with " or in the upper left. means this NE is a
GNE, and means this NE is unprovisioned.

3. Configuring 1+1 Protection for CRG Boards
Step Action
1 Select the NE367 icon on the Main Topology and then select [NE Explorer]
from the Main Menu.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 8 FAQ

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
8-4
Step Action
2 Select NE367 and select [Configuration/Board 1+1 Protection] from the
Function Tree.
3 Confirm the parameters for Q1CRG protection pair.
1+1 protection: Q1CRG Protection Pair
Primary Board: 9-Q1CRG
Secondary Board: 10-Q1CRG

4. Configuring a Clock
Configure the clock in the same way as the NEs of other types.
8.2 Configuring Boards with FEC
This section describes special configuration items for the SF16 with FEC function.
Item Action and interface
Enable FEC Right-click the NE icon on the Main Topology and select [NE
Explorer].
Select the board to configure and then select [Configuration/WDM
Interface] from the Function Tree.
Select the <Advanced Attributes> tab and set the FEC Working
State to Enabled.
Click <Apply>.

Set
overhead
bytes
Right-click the NE icon on the Main Topology and select [NE
Explorer]
Select the board to configure and then select [Configuration/WDM
Interface] from the Function Tree.
Select the <Overhead Byte> tab and you can enable AIS insertion
in the ODU layer, LCK insertion in the ODU layer, OCI insertion
in the ODU layer respectively.
Click <Apply>.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 8 FAQ

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
8-5
Item Action and interface
Set OTU
overheads
Right-click the NE icon on the Main Topology and select [NE
Explorer].
Select the board to configure and then select [Configuration/WDM
Orderwire management/Och Orderwire Management-OTN
Interface/OTU Overhead] from the Function Tree.
Configure OTU overheads.
Click <Apply>.
Set ODU
overheads
Right-click the NE icon on the Main Topology and select [NE
Explorer].
Select the board to configure and then select [Configuration/WDM
Orderwire management/Och Orderwire Management-OTN
Interface/ODU Overhead] from the Function Tree.
Configure ODU overheads.
Click <Apply>.
Set OPU
overheads
Right-click the NE icon on the Main Topology and select [NE
Explorer].
Select the board to configure and then select [Configuration/WDM
Orderwire management/Och Orderwire Management-OTN
Interface/OPU Overhead] from the Function Tree.
Configure OPU overheads.
Click <Apply>.


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 8 FAQ

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
8-6
8.3 Configuring the Extended Subrack
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports one extended subrack at most. The extended subrack
should be the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 8-2 lists the configuration requirements for
extended subracks.
Table 8-2 Configuration requirements for extended subracks
Subrack
Board
Main subrack Extended subrack
Cross-connect and
timing board
The UXCSB is required. It is
recommended to use 1+1
hot standby.
The XCE is required. It is
recommended to use 1+1 hot
standby.
SCC The GSCC is required. It is
recommended to use 1+1
hot standby.
Not required
Service processing
board
Configure service
processing boards based on
actual needs.
The PQ1, PQM, MR2A, D75S,
D12S, D12B, and MR2C
boards are supported.
PIU PIU is required. It is
recommended to use 1+1
hot standby.
PIU is required. It is
recommended to use 1+1 hot
standby.
AUX Required Required
Fan unit Required Required


Figure 8-2 Required boards for main subrack and extended subrack

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide 8 FAQ

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
8-7
8.4 Configuring Intelligent Features
Currently, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports intelligent features. The OptiX OSN 2500 and
OptiX OSN 1500 do not supports intelligent features.
For the configuration of intelligent features, refer to OptiX ASON user guidel.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide A Abbreviations and Acronyms

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
A-1
A Abbreviations and Acronyms
Abbreviation Full name
A
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
APS ATM Protection Switch
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
B
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply
C
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CC Continuity Check
COA Case-shaped Optical Amplifier
D
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DCU Dispersion Compensation Unit
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EPL Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide A Abbreviations and Acronyms

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
A-2
Abbreviation Full name
ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
F
FC Fiber Channel
FE Fast Ethernet
FICON Fiber Connection
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
H
HDLC High level Data Link Control
I
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
L
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB LoopBack
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
M
MPLS Multi-protocol Label Switch
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
N
NA Not applicable
NRZ Non Return to Zero
O
OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide A Abbreviations and Acronyms

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
A-3
Abbreviation Full name
P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
R
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
S
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SSM Synchronization Status Marker
T
TPS Tributary Protection Switching
U
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
V
VBR Variable Bit Rate
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VPN Virtual Private Network
W
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide Index

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
i-1

Index
Numerics
1:1 linear MSP, 2-16
1+1 linear MSP, 2-12
A
abbreviation, A-1
acronym, A-1
alarm parameters setting, 1-47
ATM service
configuration process, 5-7
configuring a protection group, 5-18
configuring a protection pair for ATM service, 5-20
configuring ATM traffic, 5-10
configuring binding path, 5-9
configuring cross-connect for ATM service, 5-12
configuring port attribute, 5-8
configuring the cross-connect, 5-22
B
back up
NE configuration data, 1-48
board creation
adding in the configuration guide, 1-20
adding on the NE panel, 1-19
broadcast data port
configuration procedure, 6-5
overview, 6-2
precaution, 6-3
requirement for environment monitor, 6-3
C
CAR configuration, 3-12
clock configuration
clock subnet, 1-26
priority table, 1-24
restoration parameter, 1-25
switching condition, 1-25
E
EPL service of the point-to-point
configuration process(by station), 3-7
configuring binding path, 3-9
configuring CAR, 3-12
configuring Ethernet interfaces, 3-8
configuring the cross-connect, 3-14
createing the point-to-point EPL service, 3-10
EPL service sharing one PORT
configuration process(by station), 3-29
configuration process(by trail), 3-20, 3-37
configuring binding path, 3-30
configuring Ethernet interfaces, 3-30
configuring the cross-connect, 3-32
creating the PORT shared EPL service, 3-31
EPL service sharing one VCTRUNK
configuration process(by station), 3-46
configuration process(by trail), 3-54
configuring binding path, 3-47
configuring Ethernet interfaces, 3-47
configuring the cross-connect, 3-49
creating the VCTRUNK shared EPL service, 3-48
EPLn service
configuration process(by station), 3-63
configuration process(by trail), 3-76
configuring binding path, 3-65
configuring Ethernet interface, 3-64
configuring the cross-connect, 3-68
configuring the forwarding filter table, 3-67
creating the EPLn service, 3-66
EVPL service on RPR
configuration process, 4-5
configuring binding path, 4-7
configuring Ethernet interfaces, 4-6
configuring RPR parameter, 4-10
configuring the cross-connect, 4-12
creating the EVPL service, 4-9
EVPLn service on RPR
configuration process, 4-28
configuring binding path, 4-30
configuring Ethernet interface, 4-30
configuring RPR parameter, 4-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Configuration Guide Index

Huawei Technologies Proprietary
i-2

configuring the cross-connect, 4-35
configuring the forwarding filter table, 4-33
creating the EVPLn service, 4-32
extended subrack configuration, 8-6
F
FEC configuration, 8-4
enable, 8-4
set ODU overhead, 8-5
set OPU overhead, 8-5
set OTU overhead, 8-5
set overhead, 8-4
fiber,creating, 1-20
I
intelligent feature configuration, 8-7
L
logging in to the T2000, 1-14
M
MSP ring configuration, 1-23
N
NE creation
gateway NE, 1-15
non-gateway NE, 1-16
NE user,creating, 1-17
O
orderwire configuration, 1-43
P
performance monitoring setting, 1-45
protection configuration
1:1 linear MSP, 2-15
1+1 linear MSP, 2-11
board 1+1 protection, 1-43
four-fiber MSP ring, 2-9
SNCP ring, 2-4
TPS protection, 1-42
two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, 1-23
protection subnet,creating, 1-22, 2-9
protectionconfiguration
non-protection chain, 1-23
R
REG configuration, 8-2
RPR parameter configuration, 4-10, 4-35
S
SDH/PDH
backing up NE data, 1-48
configuration process, 1-13
configuring add/drop service, 1-33
configuring alarm parameters, 1-47
configuring board 1+1 protection, 1-43
configuring clock, 1-24
configuring orderwire, 1-43
configuring pass-through service, 1-34
configuring performance event monitoring, 1-45
configuring TPS protection, 1-42
configuring VC-12 trail, 1-30
configuring VC-3 trail, 1-31
configuring VC-4 server trail, 1-29
SDH/PDH service configuration
single station function, 1-32
trail management function, 1-27
SNCP configuration, 2-4
switching an NE user, 1-18
T
topology subnet,creating, 1-21
TPS protection, 1-42

S-ar putea să vă placă și